JP2017131617A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having features on a movable body.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a movable body capable of being operated. The movable body has first light emission means, second light emission means, and a first movable part. The first light emission means is not overlapped with the first movable part in a first state, and is overlapped with the first movable part in a second state. Further, the second light emission means is not overlapped with the first movable part in the first state, and is not overlapped with the first movable part in the second state. A board on which the first light emission means is mounted is a board on which the second light emission means is also mounted. At least a part of the movable body may be overlapped with at least a part of display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

Some conventional game stands produce effects by display, sound, light, movement of a movable body , and the like in order to improve the fun of the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, in the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement with respect to the movable body .

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a movable body .

According to the present invention,
A game machine with an operable movable body,
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion,
The first light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in the first state;
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the first movable part in the second state,
The second light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in the first state,
The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the first movable part in the second state,
The substrate on which the first light emitting means is mounted is a substrate on which the second light emitting means is also mounted,
In some cases, at least a part of the movable body overlaps at least a part of the display means.
There is provided a game stand characterized by this.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand with the characteristic in the movable body can be provided.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (c) shows an example of an ordinary stop symbol. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the control unit 400. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure 1 determination. It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table, (b) is a figure which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table. The figure which shows the display screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 when it wins alternately in the 1st special figure starting port 230 and the special figure 2 special figure fixed starting port 233 by left-handing in a non-electric support state (normal state). It is. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. (A) and (b) are vertical sectional views of the passage structure 1, (c) is a sectional view taken along the line II of FIG. 15 (a), (d) is a sectional view taken along the line II-II of FIG. 15 (a), (E) is the III-III sectional view taken on the line of Fig.15 (a). It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure. It is a figure which shows the example which made the attacker approach the channel | path structure. It is a figure which shows the other example of arrangement | positioning of the channel | path structure. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure. (A) is a perspective view of the passage structure 1, and (b) is a front view of the mounting plate 14. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing of the passage aspect of a channel | path part and a game ball. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing of the example of arrangement | positioning of a ball | bowl detection sensor. (A) is a front view of the modification of a channel | path part, (b) is the perspective view. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the other example of a movable body. (A)-(d) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the other example of a movable body. It is the front view which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1, a left-right side view, a top view, and a bottom view. (A) is a rear view which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1, (b) is the perspective view of the back side. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing of the component of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. (A)-(d) is the VV sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 31, the VI-VI sectional view, the VII-VII sectional view, and the VIII-VIII sectional view in order. (A) And (b) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of a channel | path part. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line IX-IX in FIG. 33 (b), (b) is an explanatory view of an approaching state of a game ball to the opening OP2, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 33 (b). It is. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing of the channel | path part which has a guide structure of a game ball. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of an embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine of FIG. 39 from the back side. It is the front view which looked at the game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the decoration symbol, (c) is the figure which showed an example of the usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the first sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of strobe interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit, and (c) is a timer variable update interrupt of the first sub-control unit. The flowchart of a process and (d) are the flowcharts of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, and (c) is a timer interrupt of the second sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of a process. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a partially exploded rear view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a rear unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a moving mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a moving mechanism. It is a partial detail view of a moving mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body and a moving mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the example of the operation timing of a movable part. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display design of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration design, (c) Shows an example of a normal stop display symbol, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a conventional decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which shows the state (the 1) in which the production movable body 224 moved to the front of the decorative design display apparatus 208. It is the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic front view which shows the state (the 2) which the production movable body 224 moved to the front of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a disassembled perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a front view of the production movable body of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the production movable body of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is a rear view of the production movable body of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the production movable body of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the rear view and partial sectional view of the production movable body of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the production movable body 224 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of production (the 2) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 3). It is a figure which shows the example of a production in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 4). It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 5). It is a figure which shows the example of the production in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention (the 6). It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning Embodiment D of this invention from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the accessory unit 950. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700. FIG. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 1st structure 712b. (B) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. It is the schematic front view which showed the light emission board | substrate 714 of the 1st structure 712b, and the light emission board | substrate 714 of the 4th structure 712a. It is the figure which extracted only the fall expansion | deployment combination unit 700, and showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the drop expansion combination 712. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 in the fall expansion | deployment combination unit 700 of the state installed in the game board 200. FIG. It is the figure which extracted only the fall expansion | deployment combination object unit 700, and showed the rotation operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712. It is the figure which showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 of the state where it is installed in the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 of the state where it is installed in the game board 200. 5A is a circuit block diagram showing main control circuits around the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. (B) It is the block diagram which showed typically the connection relation of the various board | substrates with which the pachinko machine 100 is provided. (A) It is the figure which looked at the game board 200 from the back surface, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement location of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board | substrate 245b. (B) It is the figure which extracted a part of game board 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement location of the board surface periphery board | substrate 672. FIG. (A) It is the figure which permeate | transmitted some game boards 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning location of the accessory peripheral board | substrate 674. FIG. (B) It is the front view which extracted and showed a part of fall expansion | deployment accessory unit 700, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement place of the illumination board | substrate 676 on an accessory. It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical relationship mounted in the motor drive board | substrate 245b, and the connection relation of the motor drive board | substrate 245b and another board | substrate. It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical relationship mounted in the board | substrate surface peripheral board | substrate 672, and the connection relation of the board | substrate peripheral board | substrate 672 and another board | substrate. (A) It is the figure which showed the connection relation of the accessory peripheral board | substrate 674 and the accessory illumination board | substrate 676, and another board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical component mounted in the lighting board 676 on an accessory. It is the circuit block diagram which showed an example of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on an accessory. It is the circuit block diagram which showed the modification 1 of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on an accessory. It is the circuit block diagram which showed the modification 2 of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on an accessory. It is the circuit block diagram which showed the modification 3 of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on an accessory. It is the circuit block diagram which showed the modification 4 of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on an accessory. It is the circuit block diagram which showed the other modification of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on an accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of arrangement | positioning of LED in the lighting board 676 on an accessory. FIG. 2 is a schematic exploded perspective view showing a part of members constituting the movable body 1 in an extracted manner. (A) It is the front view which showed the surface of the 1st board | substrate 14e. (B) It is the rear view which showed the back surface of the 1st board | substrate 14e. It is the circuit block diagram which showed an example of the circuit structure of the 1st board | substrate 14e. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the movement of movable parts 11 and 12 as seen from the rear of movable body 11. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 1 of a non-mounting area | region. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 2 of a non-mounting area | region. FIG. 3 is a circuit configuration diagram of a substrate of a display device 34 that constitutes a movable body 3. (A) It is a front view of the board | substrate of the display apparatus 34 which comprises the movable body 3. FIG. (B) It is a rear view of the board | substrate of the display apparatus 34 which comprises the movable body 3. FIG. It is the figure which extracted and showed a part of certain board | substrate. It is the figure which showed a part of board | substrate with which the via | veer of the modification was formed. It is the figure which showed the motion of a certain accessory in time series. It is a figure which shows an operation example. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment in steps. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in another case following FIG. 155 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. 159 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 160 in steps. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 161. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 162. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 172 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 173; 175 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the production example in which a notice icon changes in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery during the display of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the lottery table regarding notice item.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The present invention can be applied to various game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In addition, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball The ball payout may be executed by credit.

  The following embodiments are roughly classified into five embodiments, Embodiments A to E, but the embodiments, examples, modifications, and the like included in the embodiments can be appropriately combined with each other. . In addition, the code | symbol which shows each structure is used uniformly only in the embodiment A, B, C, D, or E unless there is particular description. Therefore, for example, the same reference numerals as those in the embodiment A may be used as the reference numerals indicating the other configurations in the embodiment B.

<Embodiment A>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 (including a sealed type) or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 100 through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Hereinafter, the front side of the game board 200 may refer to the game area 124. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be locked and openable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of the game, the chance button 136 that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a player's balance of the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface (front side), and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. The game board 200 includes a game board 201 that serves as a main body of the game board 200 (or a support body for components of the game board 200). The game board 201 is a plate-like member, and the front side on the player side may be referred to as the front surface, and the back surface (back side surface) on the opposite side may be referred to as the back surface. The game board 201 may be a transparent member, a part of the game plate 201 may be a transparent member, or a non-transparent member. The game board 201 is provided with the following components.

  In the game board 201, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by the player's operation, the gate and the second special figure starting port according to the usual figure change, and the first special figure It can be divided into the figure starting port. Specifically, in a generally known right-handed machine, a first area (game area) that is a route to enter the first special figure starting port by arranging a game nail 238 or the like with respect to the game area 124. The game ball that rolls in the left region in FIG. 2 is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second special figure start port, and vice versa. The game ball that rolls in the right region in FIG. 2 is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port.

  In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, a first special figure starting port 230, a so-called electric tulip type second special figure variable starting port 232 provided with a pair of blade members 2321, and a pair of blades A second special figure fixed start port 233 provided with no member 2321 is prepared, and game balls that roll in the first region (the left region in the game region) are mainly directed to the first special figure start port 230. The game ball that rolls in the second area (the right area in the game area) can mainly be expected to pass through the gate 228, the second special figure variable start port 232, and the second special figure fixed start port. You can expect to win 233. Note that the present invention is not limited to the right-handed machine of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, but includes the above-described generally known right-handed machine and, moreover, a widely-used general game board. It can also be applied to pachinko machines.

  In the game area 124, an effect device 206 is arranged from the upper right to the center portion and further below the center portion. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 from the upper right corner to the center portion, and around it, a general-purpose display device 210, a first special figure display device 212, and a second special figure display device. 214, ordinary figure holding lamp 216, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, and high accuracy medium lamp 222 are provided.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure. In the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The general symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display device 212 correspond to an example of the first symbol variation display means, and the second special symbol display device 214 corresponds to an example of the second symbol variation display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form.

  Display area (in this case, corresponding to the size of 7 segments) and decorative symbol display device 208 (symbol display device) of the general symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 (notification means) ) Display area (here, the size of the display screen is equivalent), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the multi-purpose display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 cannot display a moving image, whereas a decorative pattern is displayed. The display device 208 can display a moving image.

  The common figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first floating games (details of the common figure floating game to be described later) that are being held. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the common figure fluctuation is shown. It is possible to hold a game up to a predetermined number (for example, two). The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means to suspend the start of various determination processes (such as success / failure determination processes) based on start-up information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a gate 228, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general) When the winning opening 226 is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. The “ball” is generically called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The gate 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the game board 200 One is arranged on the right side. The gate 228 is a starting port that is expected to enter by making a right turn. Unlike the ball that has entered the general prize opening 226, the ball that has passed through the gate 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the gate 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general-purpose variable game by the general-purpose display device 210.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and is a winning opening that is expected to enter by hitting right. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. That is, the variable winning opening 234 includes a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. It should be noted that the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 is a door-type attacker, but may be a shutter-type attacker.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, only one second special figure variable start port 232 is provided on the right side. The second special figure variable starting port 232 is a starting port that is expected to enter the ball by making a right hit. The second special figure variable start port 232 includes a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid, and corresponds to variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric tu). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the difficulty level of winning a prize to the opening of the second special figure variable start port 232. That is, if the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the opening of the second special figure variable starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult.

  On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. It is possible to enter a sphere into the opening (easy winning state), and an open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure variable start port 232 has an entrance (advancing entrance of the game ball) having a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). A variable start area in which the ease of entry of a game ball, which changes from either size to the other size, is equivalent to an example of a second start area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230.

  In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the variable start opening 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure variable starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure variable start port 232 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the following description, the second special figure variable start port 232 and the second special figure fixed start port 233 may be collectively referred to as a second special figure start port.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage structure 1 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208. The passage structure 1 is a passage formation structure that forms a passage for a game ball. Although details of the passage structure 1 will be described later, in the case of this embodiment, a passage unit including the passage portion 10, the distribution portion 11, and the passage portions 12 and 13 is configured in the present embodiment. Each of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 may have a cross-sectional shape or a cross-sectional size through which one game ball can pass. An entrance portion 10a is provided at the upper end portion of the passage portion 10, and a game ball flowing down the game area 124 can enter. The game balls that have entered the entrance portion 10 a pass through the passage portion 10 and are distributed to the passage portion 12 or the passage portion 13 in the distribution portion 11.

  The first special figure starting port 230 is inside the passage portion 12, and a start winning area R1 is set at the lower end portion of the passage portion 12 (in the present embodiment, located on the back side of the game board 201). As the game ball passes through the start winning area R1, the first special figure starting port 230 is won. More specifically, a ball detection sensor in which the detection position of the game ball is set is arranged in the start winning area R1, and when the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor, the first special figure start port 230 is won. It is detected.

  When winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 and display the first special figure. The special figure variation game by the device 212 is started. The ball that won the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning area R1 is set in the middle of the passage portion 12, the game ball passing through the passage portion 12 is detected, and the winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is detected. However, even if the start winning area R1 is set outside the passage portion 12, the game ball discharged through the passage portion 12 is detected, and it is detected that the first special figure start opening 230 has been won. Good.

  In the case of this embodiment, an opening OP1 described later with reference to FIG. 15 and the like is formed in the side portion of the passage portion 12 adjacent to the first special figure starting port 230. Therefore, as a case of winning the first special figure starting port 230, the ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 through the opening OP1 and passes through the starting winning region R1, and the passage from the entrance 10a. There is a case where the vehicle enters the structure 1, is distributed to the passage portion 12, enters the first special figure starting port 230, and passes through the starting winning area R1. Since there are multiple types of winning modes (winning routes), there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, although it entered the channel | path structure 1 from the inlet part 10a and was distributed to the channel | path part 12, it may discharge | release to the exterior of the channel | path structure 1 from the opening part OP1, In this case, the 1st special figure start port 230 Don't win a prize.

  The second special figure fixed start port 233 is inside the passage portion 13, and a start winning area R <b> 2 is located at the lower end portion of the passage portion 13 (in the present embodiment, located on the back side of the game board 201). It is set, and when the game ball passes through the start winning area R2, the second special figure fixed start port 233 is won. More specifically, a ball detection sensor in which a detection position of a game ball is set is arranged in the start winning area R2, and when a game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor, a prize is awarded to the second special figure fixed start port 233. Is detected.

  When winning the second special figure fixed starting port 233, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 and the second special figure. The special figure variation game by the display device 214 is started. The ball that won the second special figure fixed start port 233 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning area R2 is set in the middle of the passage portion 13, the game ball passing through the passage portion 13 is detected, and the winning of the second special figure fixed start port 233 is detected. However, the start winning area R2 is set outside the passage portion 13, the game ball discharged through the passage portion 13 is detected, and it is detected that the second special figure fixed start opening 233 is won. May be.

  In the case of this embodiment, an opening OP2 described later with reference to FIG. 15 and the like is formed in the side portion of the passage portion 13 adjacent to the second special figure fixed starting port 233. Therefore, in the case of winning the second special figure fixed starting port 233, in addition to the case where the starting winning area R2 is passed through the opening OP2, the passage structure 1 is entered from the inlet portion 10a and distributed to the passage portion 13. May pass through the start winning area R2. Since there are multiple types of winning modes (winning routes), there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, although it entered the channel | path structure 1 from the inlet part 10a and was distributed to the channel | path part 13, it may discharge | release to the exterior of the channel | path structure 1 from the opening part OP2, In this case, the 2nd special figure fixed starting port Do not win 233.

  In the present embodiment, the entrance portion 10a that opens upward is easier to enter the game ball flowing down the game area than the opening portion OP1 and opening portion OP2 that open in the left-right direction. .

  That is, when a game ball wins any one of the opening OP1, the opening OP2, and the entrance 10a, it passes through the start winning area R1 or R2 almost (reliably or with high probability), but the relative number As, the number of winning game balls from the entrance 10a is increased.

  The whole or a part of the passage structure 1 may be permeable. By having transparency, the player may be able to visually recognize the inside of the passage structure 1, and may be able to visually recognize or guess the distribution of the game balls.

  Note that only one variable winning opening 234 may be provided below the center of the game board 200. According to this aspect, the player is encouraged to make a left strike during the big hit game and to make a right strike after the big hit game has been completed.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or starting port to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 to enter the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows down the game area 124 while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or Win the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure variable start opening 232, the second special figure fixed start opening 233), without winning any of the winning openings or start openings, or the gate The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the production means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means. .

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as predetermined control means (for example, main control means, first sub control means, second sub control means). One of the three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 is combined. A thing can also be regarded as a predetermined control means (sub-control means).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, for example, a predetermined symbol display device, For example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210 and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a high accuracy A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the middle lamp 222, etc., and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure variable start port 232, the variable winning port 234, etc. Yes.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor of the various sensors 320 detects that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that a sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230.

  Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port, the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port is the same. , And the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port, which is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the sphere has passed through the gate 228, similarly, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the gate 228, and the latched value is obtained. And stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the gate 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure variable starting port 232, the second special figure fixed starting port 233, the variable Examples include a sensor that detects a sphere that has won a predetermined winning opening such as the winning opening 234 and a sensor that detects a sphere that passes through a gate 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 detects a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. A chance button detection sensor 426 is connected. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected to the basic circuit 402.

  Further, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the dispensing control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). A predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the predetermined voltage is supplied from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630. It may be supplied, or a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24 V AC current is converted into a 12 V DC voltage by the power management unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. The direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power management unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9v in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power management unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power management unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first ball detection sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, while the second special figure fixed start is started. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second ball detection sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the mouth 233, and the ball has entered the second special figure variable start opening 232 On the condition that this is detected by the third ball detection sensor which is a ball detection sensor, the special figure 2 variable game is started. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). 1). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Design variation display of special figure 2). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of special figures. “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure C” is a 2R special jackpot symbol, which is called sudden change. When these symbols (special illustrations A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol, which is called a sudden reduction. When the special figure B or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal. When the special figure E is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, it represents the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in the probability of winning the big hit (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure shifts to a low probability state. A high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure B, special figure D, and special figure F are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends is sometimes referred to as a special figure probability change. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, if the special drawings A to D are won, all of them shift to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state) after the big hit game ends. The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say.

  This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and is sometimes referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state.

  Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure variable start port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per pass of the sphere to the gate 228 opens three times in the electric support state (for example, three times opening for 1.7 seconds three times) Repeat, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure variable start port 232 increases by extending the electric chew release period or increasing the electric chute release frequency.

  Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second special figure variable start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of times of electric chew release is performed, the probability of entering the second special figure variable start opening 232 is increased, and the electric support state (short-time state) is also achieved. Good. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure variable start port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure variable start port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure variable start port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when special figure A and special figure C are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is completed. When the special figure B and the special figure D are stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is finished, and the non-electric support state is displayed at the 101st time. Transition to (ordinary low probability state) On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (Special Figure E, Special Figure F) is won, the system does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure variable start port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure variable starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure variable start port 232, which is the variable start area, at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball has the second special figure. The vehicle enters the variable start port 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if non-electric support is made and a right hand strike is made to aim for winning a game ball to the second special figure variable start port 232, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game (10 seconds), low-probability state (1/101), the opening time (0.3 seconds) in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure variable start port 232 is difficult to win. State.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbol. The special figure G shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first small hit symbol, and the special figure H is the second small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened or closed one or more times, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  In this embodiment, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure I shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first lost symbol, and the special figure J is the second lost symbol. When the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a losing symbol other than “special symbol I” and “special symbol J” (for example, a third losing symbol or the like) may be prepared. In this embodiment, the losing symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols. It is a waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage that the player's advantage is high is higher than the second advantage. A loss control state having a first advantage with a low advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is in one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of the control state is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the special game state to give a big hit game state advantageous to the player after the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol form. This also corresponds to an example of the providing means. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 opens and closes, it is almost impossible to expect a ball to enter the variable prize opening 234. It can also be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are also prepared as jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the special symbols A to J).

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 230, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230; The second ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure fixed start port 233, or the third ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure variable start port 232 As a condition, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → in the respective symbol display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 ... “Decoration display change” is performed to switch the display in the order of “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →.

  That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying “Special Figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot, or “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot, a combination 1 (for example, a combination of the same three decorative patterns in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) “Decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  When notifying “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot, a combination of decorative patterns in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”). ”,“ Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  When notifying “special drawing E” that is a hidden probability change, “special drawing F” that is suddenly normal, “special drawing G” or “special drawing H” that is a small hit, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and “special drawing C” that is suddenly probable or “special drawing D” that is suddenly short is reported, A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the display areas 208a to 208c.

  When notifying “Special Illustration I” or “Special Illustration J” that is a loss, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbol that is a big hit or a small hit is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, a variety of Eye) is stopped. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop display of the decorative symbol stop pattern may be referred to as decorative symbol variation stop display.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 5A) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and the stop of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern (see FIG. 10B) is larger in the design (see FIG. 10B).

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (2nd symbol mode). In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general diagram B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the detection by the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, that the sphere has passed through the gate 228, the multi-purpose display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs the “variable display of normal map” (general variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 has a special jackpot special random number counter, a small bonus special figure 1 random counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters for the special figure 2. Is provided. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time first determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation time second determination random value. Further, in the RAM 308, the number of holdings of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random value, the special figure 1 random value for the big hit, the special figure 1 random value for the small hit, the special figure 1 random value for the loss, the special figure 1 success / failure The determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, the special figure 1 variation time, and the retention number, random value, and result for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has separate storage units that are divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery), separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Yes. As will be described later, the special-purpose 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure, as will be described later, One random number value for determining one variation time is set as one set, and the five random number values are stored for each area in a winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step SA03. If the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step returns. Proceed to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power recovery command, the normal return command is the first command in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step SA15, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, 4 for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, the small hit special figure random value counter, and the lose special figure random value counter, respectively. Three initial value generation random number counters and three random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value, the special figure 1 variation time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step SB03, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step SB05, information on presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the same information), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure variable starting opening 232, and the second special figure fixed starting opening 233 It is determined that there was a ball entry or the passage of the gate 228. That is, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234 or these starting ports 230, 232, 233, or passing through the gate 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In step SB07 and step SB09, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Special-purpose timer random number, special jackpot special figure 1 random value, small bonus special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 variation time determining random value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit The random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value, the special figure 2 random value for losing, and the random value for determining the special figure 2 variation time is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step SB13, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step SB15, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning opening 234 and the starting openings 230 and 232 are won and the gate 228 is passed, the number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening or gate. The value in the storage area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

In step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), a predetermined Get startup information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number, special figure 1 winning random number value, big hit special figure 1 random value, small hit special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time Get random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are derived from a software random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start-up information deriving means, second start-up information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area shown in FIG. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random value which is starting information is acquired similarly to special figure 1, and the acquired random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 can store the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a winning order variation machine. That is, the special figure variable game (special figure of the special figure) in the order of winning the first special figure start opening 230 and the second special figure start opening (the second special figure variable start opening 232 or the second special figure fixed start opening 233). Symbol variation display) is performed. In the winning acceptance process, start information is stored so that the order of winning can be understood between special figure 1 and special figure 2.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the gate 228 and the number of pending variable games is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment), the winning random number value at that timing is The value of the random number counter for generation is acquired as a general-purpose winning random number value as start information, and stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 different from that for special charts. In this winning acceptance process, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure variable starting port 232, the second special figure fixed starting port 233, the gate 228, or the variable winning port 234 are detected by a predetermined ball detection sensor. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port, the gate 228, and the variable winning port 234 are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when winning (entering) or passing is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating whether or not there is a winning (entering ball) or passing is set.

  It should be noted that, regardless of whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step SB19.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step SB21, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the blade member 2321 of the second special figure variable start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for maintaining the state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and the solenoid for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special figure variable start port 232 (332) No signal is output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB23.

  Subsequently, in step SB23, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map variable start port 232 is not performed (the normal map state is inactive), and the general map variable game is held. If the number of is 1 or more, whether or not to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step SB24) is executed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number is provided. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time. In a command setting transmission process (step SB33), which will be described later, a command including prefetch result information is transmitted. However, prefetch result information may be transmitted only in increments, or prefetch result information for all suspensions is transmitted. You may make it do.

  Next, special figure state update processing is performed (step SB25). As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine. Hereinafter, without distinguishing between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is simply the special figure, without distinguishing the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, the special figure display device, and the first special figure starting port. 230 and the second special figure starting port may be simply referred to as a special figure starting port without being distinguished from each other.

  In the special figure state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the special figure state. For example, in the special figure state update process during the special figure fluctuation display (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device I do. By performing this control, special figure fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation display) is performed by the special figure display device.

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lose flag, second lose flag, probability change flag, and short time flag. Is prepared. In the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure change display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure related lottery process (step SB29) described later Based on the figure determination result (stop pattern mode of special figure), lighting / extinguishing drive control of 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure display device is performed, and the special figure stop display is displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308 I do. By performing this control, the special figure display device is able to obtain a 15R special jackpot symbol (Special Figure A), a 15R big jackpot symbol (Special Figure B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (Special Figure C), and a sudden short-time symbol (Special Figure D). , Hidden probability variation (Special Figure E), Sudden Normal Design (Special Figure F), First Small Hit Pattern (Special Figure G), Second Small Hit Pattern (Special Figure H), First Loss Pattern (Special Figure I) , And the second losing symbol (special symbol J). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the special figure that has been confirmed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step SB33) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure identification information indicating whether it is special figure 2 or special figure 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the process ends.

  Also, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 RAM 308 is set to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for informing the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure standby time management timer provided in FIG. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step SB33).

  Also, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the special figure standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds or The door member 2341 is held in the open state by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable prize opening 234. A signal indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step SB33).

  In the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) is variable. A signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the prize opening 234, and a closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to show. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure state update process that is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), An effect waiting period is set in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Set the information to show.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 starts the hit control state advantageous to the player after the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol mode corresponding to the winning / failing determination result. This corresponds to an example of game control means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores an opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step SB33).

  Also, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special area is not in operation in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When this loss flag is on, the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) is also stored in the RAM 308. Set special figure inactive in the setting area. In the special figure state update process when the special figure is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure state update process in step SB25 is completed, a special figure related lottery process (step SB29) is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine, and therefore, the special drawing related lottery processing is also performed in the winning order to the special drawing starting port.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step SB33).

  In the special drawing related lottery process, determination of whether or not the lottery is executed (lottery), determination of a special drawing to be stopped, and determination of a variation time are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. In the special drawing related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device is in the special figure fluctuation display or the stop display, and if any display is in progress, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If it is not displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation. If it is set during special figure operation, the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process. If it is set during non-operation of the special figure, it means that the failure determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not the predetermined failure determination condition is satisfied. The determination as to whether or not the game is appropriate is determined by referring to the special figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of special figure variable games held is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and one set of start information stored in the past from the special figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is stored. Random number values (Special figure winning random number value, Big hit special figure random number value, Small hit special figure random number value, Loss special figure random value, and Special figure variation time determination random value) The starting information (a set of random values) that is still stored is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, if the start information stored in the past in combination with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is extracted from the special figure holding storage unit and the starting information is stored in the special figure holding storage unit, the Nth oldest start information is stored. Is set as the N-1st oldest starting information in the special figure storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. Random values for one set from the special figure holding storage part of the RAM 308 (special figure winning random number value, special bonus random number value for big hits, special random number value for small hits, special figure random number for lose, and special figure variable time determination The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting (random number value) corresponds to an example of start information acquisition means.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a high / failure determination table, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a low probability table for determination. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the starting information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state is obtained. The numerical value range is 0 to 65535), and the special figure success / failure determination result is “big hit”, “small hit” or “ "Lose" is derived. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in a special figure low probability state, so based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Special figure 2 “Big hit”, “Small hit” or “Lose” is derived as the result of the determination. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” corresponds to determination of success / failure.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure determination result.

  FIG. 9C shows a special figure 1 determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 1 determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol form of special figure 1 (see FIG. 5A) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 1 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 1 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously obtained from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. The obtained numerical range is 0 to 99), and it is determined which random number range of the jackpot the result of determination of the success / failure in the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F" are determined. Also, if the special figure 1 success / failure determination result is a small hit, the special figure 1 random number for small hits (a numerical value range that can be taken is out of a set of random values previously obtained from the storage unit of the RAM 308. 0-99) determines which random number range of the small hits the result of determination of the success / failure in the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. Determine "G" or "Special Figure H". Furthermore, if the special figure 1 determination result is a loss, the special figure 1 random value for a loss (a possible numerical range is 0 to 0) out of one set of random values previously obtained from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308. 99) determines which random number range out of the losing determination results in the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. 10C, and the special figure 1 determination result is “special figure I”. Alternatively, “special drawing J” is determined. The special figure 1 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 1 to be stopped and displayed by the first special figure display device 212.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special figure 2 determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure 2 determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 5A) is defined for each success / failure determination result. In the present embodiment, for Special Figure 2, no small hit is prepared, and no 2R big hit is prepared. That is, among the stop symbol modes of the special figure shown in FIG. 5 (a), the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), the 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure B), the first lose symbol (special figure I), and the second Only the lost pattern (Special Figure J) is available. Therefore, it is more advantageous for a player to win a big hit with Special Figure 2 than a big hit with Special Figure 1 (the number of rounds is large). As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the special value is different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when the big hit is made. Special figure 1 and special figure 2 have almost the same number of balls in the big hit, but the effects and game characteristics during the big hit game (for example, a premium effect that does not appear unless a big hit is given in special figure 2), etc. A difference may be provided.

  However, in the present embodiment, the probability of determining the jackpot with probability variation in the special chart 1 determination table shown in FIG. 9C is 66% (special chart A: 50% + special chart C: 8% + special chart). E: 8%), and the probability that the jackpot with probability variation is determined in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 10 is also 66% (Special Figure A: 66%). It is the same in FIG. Note that this embodiment is a change in winning order, and during non-electric support, a special-figure 1 variable game and a special figure 2 variable game are performed alternately (except for irregular winnings) by left-handed operation. In the support state, the game is such that the special figure 2 variable game is mainly executed by a right-handed operation. Therefore, the game characteristic that it is easy to obtain an advantageous jackpot during the electric support is not different from a general special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 2 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. 10 to 99) is determined as to which random number range of the jackpot the result of determination in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. Determine "Figure A" or "Special Figure B". Further, if the result of the special figure 2 win / fail judgment is a loss, the special figure 2 random value for the loss (a numerical value range that can be taken is 0 to 0) among the random values for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308. 99) determines which random number range of the losing in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 10 belongs, and the special figure 2 determination result is “special figure I” or “special figure”. Figure J "is determined. The determination result of the special figure 2 determined here is information representing the symbol form of “special figure 2” to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special symbol variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2 is determined based on the special symbol determination result. For the determination of the fluctuation time here, a special figure fluctuation time determination random value (a possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is used. .

  FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a special chart 1 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 1 variation time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 4. Table 1 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a jackpot symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. Yes, Table 2 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Drawings C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special Drawings G and H). This is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J).

  Each of the tables 1 to 4 defines a correspondence relationship between the variation time and the random number selection range of the random value for determining the special diagram 1 variation time. In addition, in each table shown in FIG. 11A, the name of the variation pattern representing the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to each variation time is also shown for reference. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one. The main control unit 300 may determine the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure, but in the present embodiment, information representing the variation time determined here is the first sub-information. It transmits to the control part 400, and the 1st sub control part 400 determines the production | presentation aspect in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 corresponding to change time. In this embodiment, ten types of variation patterns are prepared. These fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern with a reach effect and a change pattern without a reach effect. In the present embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in the same manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is stopped. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the predetermined jackpot symbol This is a state in which the combination (“decorative symbol combination 1” or “decorative symbol combination 2” shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed.

  Super reach A and super reach B are a type of reach in which the effect of rendering is improved by adding a special variable display or the like to normal reach, and a specific character may appear.

  In addition, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  When the special figure 1 determination result is special figure A or special figure B (see Table 1), both are 15R jackpot symbols with electric support, and as shown in Table 1, the longest fluctuation time of 65 seconds Is most likely to be selected, and the fluctuating time of 15 seconds is the least likely to be selected. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect.

  If the special figure 1 decision result is a 2R jackpot symbol (Special Figure C to Special Figure F) or a small hit symbol (Special Figure G, H) (see Table 2), the fluctuation time is uniformly 12 seconds. To be elected. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily turns off the combination of decorative symbols (decorative symbol combination 3 and decorative symbol combination 4) that has been stopped and displayed after the change without reach. Done.

  When the determination result of special figure 1 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of holds in special figure 1. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines the table to be used with reference to the time reduction flag and the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308.

  When the determination result of the special figure 1 is a losing symbol (special figures I and J), the non-electric support state and the holding number of the special figure 1 is 3, the table 3 is used. In this case, in order to expedite digestion of the special figure 1, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected, and when the variation time of 3 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect. Instead, a shortened change will be made.

  Special figure 1 decision result is a losing symbol (special figure I, J), non-electric support state and special figure 1 hold number is 0-2 or electric support state (the hold number is irrelevant) For this, Table 4 is used. As shown in Table 4, a variation time of 8 seconds (unreaching without reach) is selected with a high probability, and a variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds may be selected with a low probability. . When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time is determined using the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table described above.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a special figure 2 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 2 variable time determination table is composed of tables 5 to 8, and table 5 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a jackpot symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. The contents are the same as the contents of the table 1 shown in FIG. The table 6 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the power support state, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 1 to 3. In Table 6, the electric support state is set, and the shortest fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is uniformly selected in order to expedite the digestion of the special figure 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the reach effect, and the super shortening fluctuation occurs. Will be done. Table 7 is a table used when the result of determination of special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the power support state, and the number of reserved figures in special figure 2 is zero. In the table 7, in order to store the hold of the special figure 2, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds that is somewhat longer is uniformly selected, and the decorative design display device 208 does not perform the reach effect. The table 8 is a table that is used regardless of the number of holdings of the special figure 2 when the special figure 2 determination result is the lost symbol (special figures I and J) and is in the non-electric support state. If there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232 in the non-electric support state, it becomes a rare case that the normal figure variable game is won under the normal figure low probability state. In Table 8, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds (losing without reach) is selected with a high probability without shortening or extremely shortening the fluctuation time of Fig. 2, and although it is a low probability, 10 seconds, 40 seconds, Alternatively, a 60 second variation time may be selected. When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time is determined using the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table described above.

  Returning to FIG. 7, in step SB33 performed following the special figure related lottery process in step SB29, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure. Information that can specify the type of command, such as a hold increase command, a general hold increase command, a prefetch advance notice command), and bits 0 to 10 are configured by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including information indicating information, etc., including information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, information indicating the current number of holdings, etc. In the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, information indicating the control state is included, and in the case of a winning round designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of winning rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  In step SB33, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance.

  Further, in this step SB33, a general command usual figure holding increase process is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. Note that the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 start (do) the usual figure change stop command indicating that the usual change display has stopped (do), or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step SB35) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored. When the lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the normal symbol display device 210, the first symbol is displayed via the driving circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41, and when the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43.

  In step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control part main process shown in FIG. Return.

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and processing at power-off such as initialization of the input / output port Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step SC01 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step SC01 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  In step SC05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing or the like is performed.

  In step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in SC07, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. In this effect control process, a sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at the start winning prize and a sub-side notice process at the time of variation disclosure are also performed.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In step SC15, when there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in SC09, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC17, when there is a command to drive circuit 420 for various lamps 418 in the effect data read in SC09, this command is output to drive circuit 420.

  In step SC21, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in SC09, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step SE01 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step SC21, the production random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

<Example of game flow>
Next, the special figure winning in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. Unless otherwise noted, there will be no special drawing prizes.

  FIG. 12 shows the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the first special figure starting port 230 and the special figure 2 special figure fixed starting port 233 are alternately won by left-handing in the non-electric support state (normal state). FIG.

  On the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (a), two special figure 1 hold displays 201h indicating that two special figure 1 hold are stored are shown. 2 shows two special figure 2 hold displays 202h indicating that two special figure 2 holds are stored. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12A, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3”) corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 12 (b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears. In FIG. 12 (c), a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 8-decoration”). 0-decoration 6 ") is stopped.

  In FIG. 12D, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started this time, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears. During the symbol variation display of FIG. 2, one game ball enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance 10a and is distributed to the passage 12 by the distribution unit 11, and the game ball is moved to the first special figure starting port 230. The first ball detection sensor detects that a prize has been won. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E, the special figure 1 hold display 201h is increased by one, and the number of special figure 1 hold display 201h is two in total. Eventually, it develops into a reach production (here, reach A) (see FIG. 5F). Even at this timing, one game ball enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance portion 10a and is now distributed to the passage portion 13 by the distribution portion 11, and the game ball has won the second special figure fixed start port 233. Is detected by the second sphere detection sensor 82, and in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The total number of special figure 2 hold displays 202h at this stage is two in total. The decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5G, and reach A is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. An appearing character appears. Then, immediately before the end of the symbol variation display in FIG. 2 started in FIG. 2D, another game ball enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance portion 10a and is distributed to the passage portion 12 by the distribution portion 11. The first ball detection sensor detects that the game ball has won the first special figure starting port 230. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9H, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R special jackpot (“decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. Further, three special figure 1 hold displays 201h are shown on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and two special figure 2 hold displays 202h are shown on the right side.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is in the winning order variation, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are almost alternately won in the non-electric support state, and are digested in the winning order. There are cases in which a game can be played while being pounded every time it is a big hit in Special Figure 2 that is advantageous to the above or a big hit in Special Figure 1 that is disadvantageous.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (a) shows an end effect screen for the big hit game that was a big hit in the stage of FIG. 12 (h).

  In FIG. 13 (b), the big hit game ends and the control state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, it shifts to the probability change state and the electric support state. The player changes from left-handed to right-handed in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234 arranged on the right side during the big hit game. In addition, since the big hit game has ended and the game has shifted to the electric support state, the player continues to make a right turn aiming at the second special figure variable start port 232 (so-called electric Chu) arranged on the right side. In FIG. 13 (b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears. In FIG. 13 (c), a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 7-decoration”). 4-decoration 3 ") is stopped.

  In FIG. 13D, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started this time, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears. In FIG. 5E, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 13 (f), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started again, and one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears. During the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, one game ball wins the second special figure variable start port 232 (so-called electric Chu). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6G, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 7-decoration 4-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold display 202h is increased by one, and the number of special figure 2 hold displays 202h is two in total.

  In FIG. 13 (h), the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  During the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in FIG. 13 (h), two game balls continuously win the second special figure variable start port 232. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, the special figure 2 hold display 202h is increased by two, and the total number of special figure 2 hold displays 202h is three. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5B, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 14C, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears, and the number of hold in special figure 1 becomes zero. While the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed, the game ball continuously wins the second special figure variable start port 232, but at the stage where one game ball wins the second special figure variable start port 232, the special figure is displayed. The number of reserves of 2 is full and subsequent winnings are not held. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 4D, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 7-decoration 4—decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold display 202h is increased by one, and the total number of the special figure 2 hold display 202h is four (full tank).

  In FIG. 14E, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears. Eventually it developed into a reach production (here, normal reach) (see (f) in the same figure), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (g) in the same figure has a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to 15R jackpot ("decoration 6-decoration"). 6-decoration 6 ") is stopped. When the big hit game by the big hit here ends, the control state shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the state shifts to the non-probable change state and the electric support state. For this reason, the player aims at the second special figure variable start port 232 (so-called electric chew) arranged on the right side and continues to make a right turn until the electric support state is finished. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the winning in the mouth 232 is repeated.

  In the above description, the pre-reading advance notice lottery has been lost, and the pre-reading notice by the hold change display has never been executed.However, if the pre-reading notice execution lottery using the hold display is won, The display mode is changed to a display mode (for example, a triangular figure or a square figure) of the prefetch notice.

<Passage structure>
Details of the passage structure 1 will be described. 15A and 15B are explanatory views of the structure of the passage structure 1 and the sorting operation, and are cross-sectional views along a vertical plane parallel to the plane direction of the game board 201. FIG. FIG.15 (c)-FIG.15 (e) are respectively the II sectional view taken on the line of Fig.15 (a), the II-II sectional view, and the III-III sectional view.

  The passage structure 1 of the present embodiment constitutes a hollow passage unit and is provided on the game board 201. The passage structure 1 has a plurality of attachment portions 1a formed in an ear shape, and is fixed to the game board 201 by inserting screws or the like into holes formed in the attachment portions 1a. The passage structure 1 may be made of a transparent or translucent resin, in which case the movement of the game ball may be visible.

  Each of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 constitutes a cylindrical body having a square cross section (here, square) formed by surrounding the internal space with four plate-like walls. In the case of the present embodiment, all of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 are configured to surround the internal space with four plate-like wall bodies, but are configured by three wall portions of the front wall portion and the left and right side wall portions. In addition, the rear wall portion may be configured to use the game board 201. The passage portions 10, 12 and 13 may have a cylindrical shape or an elliptical cylindrical shape.

  The passage portion 10 extends in the vertical direction, and an inlet portion 10a is provided at an upper end portion thereof. Between the passage part 10 and the passage part 12 and the passage part 13, a distribution part 11 that distributes the game balls that have entered the passage part 10 to the passage part 12 or the passage part 13 is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the distribution unit 11 includes a movable body 20. The movable body 20 is a sorting member that performs a game ball sorting operation.

  The movable body 20 includes a plate-shaped rotating plate 21 and guide plates 22 and 23 provided at the left and right ends of the rotating plate 21. The rotating plate 21 is supported by a wall portion surrounding the distribution portion 11 so as to be rotatable about a shaft 24 extending in the left-right direction. The rotating plate 21 has a size that divides the internal space of the allocating unit 11 in the vertical direction, and game balls falling from the passage unit 10 always interfere with each other. As for the rotating plate 21, the one surface side and the opposite surface side each comprise the mounting part of a game ball.

  The guide plates 22 and 23 are semicircular members protruding from the rotating plate 21 so as to be in opposite directions. The guide plate 22 protrudes from one end portion in the left-right direction of the rotating plate 21 in one direction in the normal direction of the rotating plate 21, and the guide plate 23 projects from the other end portion in the left-right direction of the rotating plate 21. It protrudes in the other direction of the line direction. In the state of FIG. 15A, the guide plate 22 is in a state of closing the entrance of the passage portion 12, and in the state of FIG. 15B, the guide plate 23 is in a state of closing the entrance of the passage portion 13.

  As shown in FIG. 15A to FIG. 15B, when the game ball falls on the rotating plate 21 and the rotating plate 21 rotates, the gaming ball falls below the rotating plate 21 and the rotating plate 21 is reversed. To do. In the state of FIG. 15 (b), the game ball is guided to the passage portion 12. If the game ball enters the passage portion 10 in the state of FIG. 15B and the game ball falls on the rotating plate 21 and the rotating plate 21 rotates, the gaming ball falls below the rotating plate 21 and rotates. The board 21 is reversed and returns to the state of FIG. 15A, and the game ball is guided to the passage portion 13. Thus, the game balls are basically distributed alternately to the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13.

  The passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 are configured such that a game ball that has passed through the passage portion 10 can pass through the distribution portion 11. In the present embodiment, the distribution destination passage portions are the two passage portions 12 and 13, but the distribution destination passage portions may be three or more. When the game balls are distributed to three or more passage parts, for example, the rotating plate 21 of the movable body 20 is configured in a water wheel shape having three placement parts, and the first placement part of the rotation plate 21 is directed downward. The placement unit may be configured to distribute game balls to the left and the third placement unit to the right. In this case, the first placement portion has a pair of wall portions that restrict the movement of the game ball to the left and right, and the second placement portion has an L-shape that restricts the movement of the game ball to the right and down. The mold may have two wall portions, and the third placement portion may have an L-shaped two wall portion that restricts the movement of the game ball to the left and down. Further, as another example of distributing game balls to three or more passage parts, two movable bodies 20 are provided, and one movable body 20 distributes game balls to the left and another movable body 20 and separates them. The body 20 may distribute the game balls to the middle and right.

  Next, the passage portion 12 includes passage portions 12a and 12b positioned on the near side (player side) from the surface of the game board 201, and a passage portion 12c extending through the game board 201 to the back side. including. Similarly, the passage portion 13 includes passage portions 13a and 13b positioned on the near side (player side) of the surface of the game board 201, and a passage portion 13c extending through the game board 201 to the back side. Including.

  In the case of this embodiment, the passage portion 12a constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 12a may be referred to as a vertical portion 12a. The vertical part 12a of this embodiment extends linearly in the up-down direction. The passage portion 12b is a portion connecting the vertical portion 12a and the allocating portion 11 and extends obliquely in the present embodiment. The passage portion 12 c extends from the lower end portion of the vertical portion 12 a to the back side of the game board 201, and includes a portion on the back side from the surface of the game board 201. The passage portion 12c may be a vertical portion.

  As shown by a solid line in FIG. 15C, an annular first sphere detection sensor SR1 is disposed in the middle of the passage portion 12c, and an area inside the first sphere detection sensor SR1 is set as a start winning area R1. ing. The first sphere detection sensor SR1 may be disposed at a position away from the passage portion 12c, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 15C. In this case, the start winning region R1 is located at a position away from the passage portion 12c. Will be set. When the first ball detection sensor SR1 is arranged as shown by the solid line in FIG. 15C, the game ball passing through the passage portion 12 can be detected, and the first ball is detected as shown by the broken line in FIG. When the sensor SR1 is arranged, a game ball that has passed through the passage portion 12 can be detected.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the passage portion 13a constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13a may be referred to as a vertical portion 13a. The vertical portion 13a of the present embodiment extends linearly in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13b is a portion that connects the vertical portion 13a and the allocating portion 11 and is curved in an inverted C shape in this embodiment. The passage portion 13 c extends from the lower end portion of the vertical portion 13 a to the back side of the game board 201, and includes a part on the back side from the surface of the game board 201. The passage portion 13c may be a vertical portion.

  An annular second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged in the middle of the passage portion 13c as shown by a solid line in FIG. 15 (d), and an area inside the second ball detection sensor SR2 is set as a start winning area R2. ing. The second ball detection sensor SR2 may be disposed at a position away from the passage portion 13c as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 15D, and in this case, the start winning region R2 is located at a position away from the passage portion 13c. Will be set. When the second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged as shown by the solid line in FIG. 15D, the game ball passing through the passage portion 13 can be detected, and the second ball is detected as shown by the broken line in FIG. When the sensor SR2 is arranged, a game ball that has passed through the passage portion 13 can be detected.

  The time for the game ball to reach the first ball detection sensor SR1 or the second ball detection sensor SR2 from the entrance 10 may be the same or different. In other words, the path length from the entrance 10 to the first sphere detection sensor SR1 or the second sphere detection sensor SR2 (for example, the line length passing through the center of the cross section of the path) may be the same or different.

  Each of the vertical portions 12a and 13a is a square cylinder having a square cross section, and has a total of four side portions on the left and right sides, the front side, and the back side. As the left and right side portions of the four side portions, the vertical portion 12a has side portions S21 and S22, and the vertical portion 13a has side portions S31 and S32. In the case of this embodiment, side part S21, S22, S31, and S32 are flat vertical surfaces, and each side surface of the vertical parts 12a and 13a is formed. The side portions S21 and S31 are outer side surfaces, and the side portions S22 and S32 are inner side surfaces. In the present embodiment, an opening OP1 penetrating each side portion is formed in the side portions S21 and S22, and the internal space of the vertical portion 12a immediately below the opening portion OP1 serves as the first special figure starting port 230. ing. Similarly, an opening OP2 penetrating each side portion is formed in the side portions S31 and S32, and the internal space of the vertical portion 13a immediately below the opening portion OP2 serves as the second special figure fixed start port 233. Yes.

  The distance of the game ball from the entrance 10 to the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure fixed starting port 233 may be the same or different. In other words, the passage length from the inlet 10 to the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure fixed starting port 233 (for example, the line length passing through the center of the cross section of the passage) may be the same or different. Good.

  Next, the arrangement of the vertical portions 12a and 13a will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, two vertical portions 12a and 13a having the same cross-sectional shape and cross-sectional size are arranged in parallel in parallel in the left-right direction, and one of them is arranged close to the other. This will be specifically described below.

  15A and 15E show a virtual vertical line CL as a position reference. The virtual vertical line CL is parallel to the game board 201 (parallel to the surface direction. When the game board 201 has undulations, the flat surface portion having the largest area is used as a reference), and the center of the distribution unit 11 Is a virtual vertical line passing through. The center of the distribution unit 11 may be the center in the width direction (left-right direction) of the distribution unit 11, but in the illustrated example, the horizontal direction and depth direction of the distribution unit 11 (normal line of the game board 201). Direction.When the game board 201 has undulations, the flat surface portion having the largest area is used as the center).

  In the present embodiment, of the four side portions of the vertical portion 12a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S21. Of the four side portions of the vertical portion 13a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S31. Comparing the positions of the side part S21 and the side part S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL, the side part S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side part S21, and accordingly, the vertical part 13a is closer to the vertical part 12a. The direction is biased toward the virtual vertical line CL.

  In FIGS. 15B and 15E, regions R11 and R12 are illustrated as position references. A region R11 is a region in the passage structure 1 and is a region where the distribution unit 11 is located. In the case of this embodiment, the space includes the movable body 20. The region R12 extends downward from the region R11, and further, in the depth direction of the game board 201 (as described above, the normal direction of the game board 201. If the game board 201 has undulations, the flat surface portion having the largest area) This is an expanded space.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The entire vertical portion 13a may overlap with the region R12, but in the present embodiment, a portion thereof overlaps. Although the vertical portion 12a may overlap the region R12, in the case of the present embodiment, the vertical portion 12a is located at a position that does not overlap. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is biased toward the virtual vertical line CL rather than the vertical portion 12a.

  In the present embodiment, by bringing the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portions 12a and 13a closer to the vertical portion 12a, the passage structure 1 may be compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of other configurations is improved. It may be possible, and replacement and maintenance may be facilitated. FIG. 20 shows an example in which the degree of freedom of arrangement is improved. The game board 200A shown in the figure is provided with two variable winning holes (attackers) 234 and 234A. The variable winning hole 234A is located below the game area 124 and in the left-right direction from the center. . Since the vertical portion 13a is biased to the left side and a space is formed on the right side thereof, the variable winning opening 234A is disposed at a more central position in the left-right direction. Here, the variable prize opening (attacker) 234A is arranged adjacent to the vertical portion 13a, but various devices such as a V-attacker and a dead ball effect device can be arranged.

  Returning to FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the passage portion 13 includes a portion that does not overlap the region R <b> 12. Specifically, the passage portion 13b does not substantially overlap the region R12. Thus, providing a portion that overlaps with the region R12 and a portion that does not overlap, that is, the passage portion 13 becomes a passage that is partially curved or bent, making it difficult to perform illegal acts such as a threaded ball goto. May be possible.

<Other configuration examples of passage structure>
Another configuration example of the passage structure 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The example of FIG. 16A illustrates a configuration in which the passage portion 12b of the passage portion 12 is curved in a C shape and the vertical portion 12a is moved closer to the vertical portion 13a than the example of FIG. In the example of the figure, a part of the vertical portion 12a overlaps the region R12. Thus, it is good also as a structure which put both the vertical parts 12a and 13a near each other, and, thereby, the arrangement | positioning space of another structure may be produced on both the left side and the right side of the channel | path structure 1. The degree of curvature (for example, the curvature) of the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 13b may be different or the same. In the example of FIG. 16A, the curvature is different in the passage portion 13b. It is getting bigger.

  The example of FIG. 16B illustrates a configuration in which the passage portion 13 has a plurality of vertical portions. In the example of the figure, in addition to the vertical portion 13a, a midway portion 13d of the passage portion 13b constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13b is not formed in an arc shape, but is formed so as to bend a straight portion, and a part thereof constitutes a vertical portion 13d. There are cases where it is easy to arrange other adjacent components by making the outer shape of the straight portion bent rather than arcuate. When one passage portion has a plurality of vertical portions as in the example of FIG. 16B, any one of the vertical portions 13a and 13d in the side portion of one vertical portion (in FIG. 16B). As for the side portion, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL only needs to be closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21 of the vertical portion 12a. Further, the lengths of the vertical portions 12a, 13a, and 13d may be the same or different. In the example of FIG. 16B, the lengths of the vertical portions are different in the vertical portion 12a> vertical. Part 13d> vertical part 13a.

  The example of FIG. 16C illustrates a configuration in which the vertical portions 12a and the vertical portions 13a have different vertical lengths. The lengths in the vertical direction are different from each other up to the upper end and the lower end of each side part of one vertical part and the upper and lower ends of each side part of the other vertical part. It may mean that there is no length that is the same, and the total length is different.

  The example of FIG. 16C illustrates a configuration in which the range of the passage portion 13b in the passage portion 13 is wider than the range of the vertical portion 13a (for example, the passage length is longer). Since the passage portion 13b is large, the passage structure 1 may be conspicuous.

  The example of FIG. 16D illustrates a configuration in which the vertical portion 13a is arranged closer to the vertical portion 12a than the virtual vertical line CL. By increasing the bias of the vertical portion 13a toward the vertical portion 12a, there may be a case where the arrangement space of another configuration adjacent to the vertical portion 13a can be increased. Moreover, the channel | path structure 1 may become a unique external shape as a whole, and the channel | path structure 1 may be made conspicuous.

  In the example of FIGS. 15 and 16, the opening OP1 and the opening OP2 are located at the same height when viewed in the vertical direction, but may be arranged so as to be shifted in the vertical direction. Further, the two openings OP1 may be arranged so as to be shifted in the vertical direction, and similarly, the two openings OP2 may be arranged so as to be shifted in the vertical direction.

  Another configuration example of the passage structure 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. In the example of FIGS. 15 and 16, the configuration example in which the game ball is guided to the start winning areas R <b> 1 and R <b> 2 is illustrated, but a configuration in which the game ball is guided to another area may be used.

  In the example of FIG. 17A, the passage portion 12 guides the game ball to the general winning area 2 a, and the passage portion 13 has the lower end portion of the vertical portion 13 a opened downward, and the game ball is placed behind the game board 201. Instead, the configuration in which the game area 124 flows down as it is is illustrated. In the vertical portion 12 a of the passage portion 12, a general winning opening 2 is formed instead of the first special figure starting opening 230, but the structure is the same.

  In the example of FIG. 17B, the passage portion 12 guides the game ball to the general winning area 2 a, and the passage portion 13 has the lower end portion of the vertical portion 13 a opened downward, and the game ball is placed behind the game board 201. Instead, the configuration in which the game area 124 flows down as it is is illustrated. The game area below the vertical portion 13a is provided with a variable winning opening (here, a door-type electric chew) 3, and an annular ball detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) is provided in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. ) SR3 is arranged. When it is detected by the ball detection sensor SR3 that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable ball opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball having entered the vertical portion 13a can be changed to the variable ball 3 May win. Note that the variable winning opening 3 may be a Vero electric Chu, a tulip, a wing electric Chu, a shutter electric Chu, etc., in addition to the door electric Chu.

  In the example of FIG. 17C, the lower end portions of the vertical portions 12a and 13a of the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 are opened downward, and the game ball is not directly placed on the game area 124 but on the back side of the game board 201. The structure to flow down is illustrated. An annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR4 is arranged in the middle of the vertical portion 12a, and an annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is arranged in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. Yes. When a game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor SR3 or SR4, it is possible to determine whether or not the usual variable game is won.

  Thus, the path structure 1 may guide the game ball to any part. Depending on the guide destination, for example, the passage structure 1 can be arranged at the position illustrated in FIG. The game board 200B shown in the figure has the passage structure 1 disposed at the right end portion of the game area 124, and the vertical portion 13a is biased to the left side to form a space on the right side, so that the right rail is avoided. A passage structure 1 is arranged. In the configuration example shown in the figure, the passage structure 1 is arranged so that the entrance 10 a is located below the gate 228, and the entered game ball is discharged to the surface side of the game board 201. As the distribution destination, various patterns such as an attacker, an electric chew, and a general winning opening can be selected. Also, the ball detection sensors SR1 to SR4 may be used for any winnings such as start winnings, general winnings, etc., depending on the installed site.

  Next, the passage structure 1 may be constituted by only a cylindrical passage unit as in the above example, or may be constituted by a combination of a passage unit and a game nail. The example of FIGS. 18 and 19 shows an example in which the passage portion is partially formed by a plurality of game nails 238.

  The example of FIG. 18A includes a passage portion 13e in which the passage portion 13 is formed of a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 is opened downward, and a passage portion 13e is formed following this. The passage portion 13e is configured to guide the game ball to the general winning opening 2. The interval between adjacent game nails 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. However, in the example shown in the figure, there are places where the interval between adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. In some cases, it may flow out of the passageway. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 is opened downward, and a variable winning opening (attacker) 4 is disposed below the lower end portion.

  The example of FIG. 18B also includes a passage portion 13e in which the passage portion 13 is formed by a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 is opened downward, and a passage portion 13e is formed following this. The passage portion 13e is configured to guide the game ball to the variable winning opening (here, a door-type electric chew) 3. The interval between adjacent game nails 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball. However, in the example shown in the figure, there are places where the interval between adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. In some cases, it may flow out of the passageway. An annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is disposed in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. When it is detected by the ball detection sensor SR3 that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable ball opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball having entered the vertical portion 13a can be changed to the variable ball 3 May win.

  Further, in the example shown in the figure, the passage portion 12 also includes a passage portion 12 d formed by a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 is opened downward, and a passage portion 12d is formed following this. The passage portion 12 d is configured to guide the game ball to the general winning opening 2. The interval between adjacent game nails 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but there may be a portion where the interval between adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the interval between the lower end of the vertical portion 12a and the adjacent game nail 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but in the example of the figure, the interval between the adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. There are places, and when the game ball enters the passage portion 12d from the vertical portion 12a, it may flow down to the outside of the passage.

  The example of FIG. 18C includes a passage portion 12d in which the passage portion 12 is formed of a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 is opened downward, and a passage portion 12d is formed following this. The passage portion 12d is not configured to guide the game ball to a specific winning opening, and the game ball that has passed through the passage portion 12d further flows down the game area 124. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 opens downward, and a variable winning opening (here, a door-type electric chew) 3 is disposed below the lower end portion. An annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is disposed in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. When it is detected by the ball detection sensor SR3 that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable ball opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball having entered the vertical portion 13a can be changed to the variable ball 3 May win.

  FIGS. 19A and 19B show an example in which the passage portion 13 is entirely composed of a plurality of game nails 238. 19A and 19B are configured such that the passage portion 13 guides the game ball to the general winning port 2, but the example of FIG. The vertical portion 13a is longer in the vertical direction than the example in b), and the lower end thereof is close to the general winning opening 2. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the passage portion 13 may be more likely to win the general winning opening 2 in the example of FIG.

<Configuration Example 1 for Passing a Game Board Multiple Times>
A configuration example of the passage structure 1 in which a game ball passes through the game board 201 a plurality of times will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component similar to said channel | path structure 1. FIG.

  FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the passage structure 1 in this example. The passage structure 1 of this example is attached to the game board 201 via the plate-like attachment part 14. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a state where the passage structure 1 of FIG. 22 is attached to the game board 201. 24A is a perspective view of the passage structure 1, and FIG. 24B is a front view of the mounting portion 14. FIG.

  The game board 201 is formed with an opening (not shown) into which each passage portion of the passage structure 1 is inserted, and a part of the structure of the passage structure 1 protrudes from the back of the game board 201 while being attached. The part 14 is fixed to the surface of the game board 201 with a screw or the like.

  The passage portion 10 and the inlet portion 10 a are located on the front side with respect to the attachment portion 14, and are therefore located on the near side of the surface of the game board 201. The attachment portion 14 is formed with an opening portion 14a for positioning the passage portion 10 on the near side.

  The allocating portion 11 is located on the back side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and is therefore located on the back side with respect to the surface of the game board 201, and the game ball that has flowed down the game area 124 and entered the entrance portion 10 a. Is once guided to the back side of the game board 201. Since the distribution unit 11 is located behind the game board 201, it may be difficult to visually recognize the distribution of the game balls from the player, and the expectation of the distribution direction may be improved. In some cases, it may be difficult to perform an action.

  A fixed sorting member 30 is arranged in the sorting unit 11. In the case of this example, the distribution member 30 is a triangular prism-shaped member, and the top portion thereof faces the passage portion 10, and slopes are formed on the left and right sides from the top portion. The game balls that have passed through the passage 10 collide with the vicinity of the top of the sorting member 30 and are distributed to the left and right. The distribution unit 11 may be provided with the movable body 20 as described above, or may be a fixed member as in this example.

  Of the passage portion 12, the vertical portion 12 a is located on the front side with respect to the attachment portion 14, and is therefore located on the near side of the surface of the game board 201. The attachment portion 14 is formed with an opening portion 14b for positioning the passage portion 10 on the near side. Of the passage portion 12, the passage portions 12 b and 12 c are mainly located on the back side with respect to the attachment portion 14, and therefore located on the back side with respect to the surface of the game board 201. The first sphere detection sensor SR1 is disposed at the lower end of the passage portion 12c, and the area inside the first sphere detection sensor SR1 is a start winning area R1.

  Of the passage portion 13, the vertical portion 13 a is located on the front side with respect to the attachment portion 14, and is therefore located on the near side of the surface of the game board 201. The attachment portion 14 is formed with an opening portion 14c that positions the passage portion 10 on the front side. Of the passage portion 12, the passage portions 13 b and 13 c are mainly located on the back side with respect to the attachment portion 14, and are therefore located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. A second sphere detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the lower end of the passage portion 13c, and an area inside the second sphere detection sensor SR2 is a start winning area R2.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the structure of a channel | path part and the passage aspect of a game ball are demonstrated. Fig.25 (a) is a front view of the channel | path structure 1, FIG.25 (b) is the IV-IV sectional view taken on the line of Fig.25 (a). 25 (c) and 25 (d) are a left side view and a right side view of the passage structure 1, respectively.

  In the case of this example, the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 form a cylindrical body having a square cross section (here, a square shape), but may be circular or elliptical.

  The passage portion 12 is provided with a partition wall 12g that divides the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 12c in the vertical direction, and a rib 12h that guides the passage of the game ball. An opening OP1 is formed in each of the side portions S21 and S22 of the vertical portion 12a, and an internal space immediately below the opening OP1 serves as a first start winning opening 230.

  Similarly, the passage portion 13 is provided with a partition wall 13g that vertically divides the passage portion 13b and the passage portion 13c, and a rib 13h that guides the passage of the game ball. Also, ribs 13f for guiding the passage of the game ball are formed in the vertical portion 13a. Although not shown, ribs similar to the ribs 13f are also formed in the vertical portion 12a. An opening OP2 is formed in each of the side portions S31 and S32 of the vertical portion 13a, and an internal space immediately below the opening OP2 serves as a second fixed start winning opening 233.

  25A and 25B illustrate a virtual vertical line CL and regions R11 and R12. Of the side parts of the vertical part 12a, the side part farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side part S21, and among the side parts of the vertical part 13a, the side part farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side part S31. Comparing the positions of the side part S21 and the side part S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL, the side part S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side part S21, and accordingly, the vertical part 13a is closer to the vertical part 12a. The direction is biased toward the virtual vertical line CL. The region R11 is a space that includes the sorting member 30, and the region R12 is a space that extends downward from the region R11 as described above and further extends in the depth direction of the game board 201.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The whole vertical portion 13a may overlap with the region R12, but in this example, a portion thereof overlaps. Although the vertical portion 12a may overlap the region R12, in the present example, the vertical portion 12a is located at a position that does not overlap. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is biased toward the virtual vertical line CL rather than the vertical portion 12a. By bringing the vertical portion 13a out of the vertical portions 12a and 13a toward the vertical portion 12a side, the passage structure 1 may be compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom in arrangement of other configurations may be improved. Also, replacement and maintenance may be facilitated.

  With reference to FIG. 25 (b) and FIG. 25 (d), the passing mode of the game ball in the passage portion 13 will be described. The game balls that have entered the passage portion 10 from the entrance portion 10 a are guided to the back side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201), and are distributed to the left or right in the distribution portion 11. When it is distributed to the right, it enters the passage portion 13 b of the passage portion 13. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13b is guided to the vertical portion 13a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201). The passage portion 13b includes a portion that does not overlap the region R12, and the game ball passes while moving to a position that does not overlap the region R12.

  The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 13a is again guided to the passage portion 13c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201). The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13c falls downward and is discharged out of the passage, and the passage is detected by the second ball detection sensor SR2 in the middle thereof.

  With reference to FIG. 25 (c), a manner of passing the game ball in the passage portion 12 will be described. The passing mode of the game ball in the passage portion 12 is basically the same as the passing mode in the passage portion 13.

  The game balls that have entered the passage portion 10 from the entrance portion 10 a are guided to the back side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201), and are distributed to the left or right in the distribution portion 11. When it is distributed to the left, it enters the passage portion 12b of the passage portion 12. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12b is guided to the vertical portion 12a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201).

  The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 12a is again guided to the passage portion 12c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201). The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12c falls downward and is discharged out of the passage, and the passage is detected by the first ball detection sensor SR1 in the middle thereof.

  Thus, in this example, since the game ball passes through the passage portion 13 while meandering in the depth direction, it is difficult to visually recognize the passing mode of the game ball from the player, and the expectation for the passing direction may be improved. Further, since the game ball passes through the back side of the game board 201, it may be possible to make it difficult to perform cheating.

  In this example, in both the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13, the game ball passes through the passage portion while meandering in the depth direction, but one of them is a passage portion that does not meander in the depth direction (for example, 15 to 19).

  As a modification of this example, the configurations of the examples illustrated in FIGS. 15 to 19 are also applicable.

  For example, the first ball detection sensor SR1 and the second ball detection sensor SR2 may detect a game ball after passing instead of a game ball passing through the passage structure 1. FIGS. 26A to 26C show an example. Although the figure shows an example of the arrangement of the second sphere detection sensor SR2, it can also be applied to the first sphere detection sensor SR1. In the example of FIG. 15A, the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed outside the passage portion 13c, and a game ball discharged from the passage portion 13c is detected. The game ball is treated as a dead ball after detection. In the example of FIG. 15B, the passage portion 13c is omitted, the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the exit of the vertical portion 13a, and the game ball passes through the second ball detection sensor SR2 in the depth direction. The direction is set so that it does. The game ball is treated as a dead ball after detection. In the example of FIG. 15C, the passage portion 13c is omitted, and the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the outlet of the vertical portion 13a, but the outlet of the vertical portion 13a is on the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the game board). The second sphere detection sensor SR2 is arranged below the outlet of the vertical portion 13a. The game ball can be handled as an effective ball that flows down the game area 124 even after detection. In the case of this configuration example, the present invention is also applicable to an example in which a general winning opening, a variable winning opening or an electric chew is provided below the second ball detection sensor SR2.

  Further, for example, the vertical portion 13a shown in FIG. 16D may be largely biased toward the vertical portion 12a. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example thereof, FIG. 27A is a front view, and FIG. 27B is a perspective view. In the example of the figure, the passage portion 13b has a portion extending obliquely long, and thereby the vertical portion 13a is largely biased toward the vertical portion 12a. As shown in FIG. 16D, the vertical portion 13a is not positioned on the vertical portion 12a side with respect to the virtual vertical line CL, but the side portion S31 side overlaps the region R12, and the side portion S32 side overlaps the region R12. It is in a position that cannot be. Moreover, in the example of the same figure, unlike the example of FIGS. 22-25, the vertical part 12a and the vertical part 13a are arranged in parallel by the same height in the up-down direction.

  Further, for example, a movable sorting member can be adopted instead of the fixed sorting member 30. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example. The example of FIG. 28A illustrates a movable body 31 that is a movable sorting member. The movable body 31 has a T-shaped horizontal cross section, and can be rotated around a rotation center axis 31a in the vertical direction. The game balls are distributed to the left and right according to the direction of the plate-like portion 31b protruding to the front side. The example of FIG. 28B illustrates a movable body 32 that is a movable sorting member. The movable body 32 is configured by providing a semicircular disk-like portion on the back of a portion having a T-shaped vertical cross section, and is rotatable around a rotation center axis 32a in the depth direction. The game balls are distributed to the left and right according to the direction of the plate-like portion 32b protruding upward.

  Such a movable body may be active that is rotated by a driving source such as a motor, or may be passive that is rotated by using the bias of game balls to be distributed. When rotating by a drive source such as a motor, the pachinko machine 100 may always rotate at a constant cycle from the time of turning on the power.

  In the case of a passive device that rotates using the bias of the game ball, a blocking mechanism that prevents the movable body from stopping at a position where it cannot be distributed may be provided. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of this, and is a view of the periphery of the allocating unit 11 as viewed from above.

  The movable body 33 shown in FIG. 29 (a) is a sorting member that has a structure similar to the example of FIG. 28 (a) and rotates around the rotation center axis 33a in the vertical direction. On the right and left sides, concave portions 33b are arranged side by side. A rotation urging force is applied to the movable body 33 by the game ball coming into contact with the recess 33b. FIG. 29A shows a state in which a game ball entering the sorting unit 11 from the passage unit 10 is in contact with the left side recess 33b. The movable body 33 is urged by the contact of the game ball and rotates to the left as shown in FIG. 29C, and the game ball is guided to the passage portion 12. Next, since the game ball entering the distribution unit 11 from the passage portion 10 comes into contact with the right concave portion 33b, the movable body 33 rotates to the right side, and the game ball is guided to the passage portion 13, and FIG. Return to the state of a). In this way, the game balls are distributed to the left and right in order.

  A magnet 33 c is disposed on the back side of the movable body 33. A magnet 34 having a polarity repelling the magnet 33c is disposed below the magnet 33c. The combination of the magnet 33c and the magnet 34 prevents the movable body 33 from resting at the position shown in FIGS. 29B and 29D. That is, since the magnet 33c and the magnet 34 overlap each other in the vertical direction and repel each other, the movable body 33 is not stationary at the position shown in FIGS. 29 (a) or 29 (c)).

  29 (b) and FIG. 29 (d) are positions where the boundary between the left and right recesses 33b faces the passage portion 10, and the game balls passed by the passage portion 10 do not sufficiently contact any of the recesses 33b. It is. When the movable body 33 is in the position of FIG. 29B or 29D, it becomes difficult to move the game ball to the left and right so that the game ball is sandwiched between the surrounding wall portion and the movable body 33. Sorting may not be performed smoothly. In particular, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in a store, if the movable body 33 is accidentally positioned at the position of FIG. 29B or 29D, then the game ball by the movable body 33 is used. However, in the case of the present embodiment, it may be possible to prevent the movable body 33 from being positioned at the positions shown in FIGS. 29B and 29D by the magnets 33c and 34.

  In order to ensure that the movable body and the game ball are caught more reliably during the sorting, a friction improving unit that improves the friction with the game ball may be provided on the movable body. FIG. 30 shows an example. The movable body 33 shown in the figure is a modification of the movable body shown in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the friction improving portion 33d is a protruding portion projecting inward, and when the game ball comes into contact with the concave portion 33b, the urging force of the game ball is movable by being caught between the game ball and the friction improving portion 33d. In some cases, the movement is reliably transmitted by the body 33 and the rotation of the movable body 33 is promoted.

<Configuration Example 2 for Passing a Game Board Multiple Times>
A configuration example of the passage structure 1 in which a game ball passes through the game board 201 a plurality of times will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component similar to said channel | path structure 1. FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a front view, left and right side views, a plan view, and a bottom view of the passage structure 1 in this example. FIG. 32A is a rear view of the passage structure 1 in this example, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the rear side thereof.

  The passage structure 1 of the present example is roughly divided into three members, and has a front cover member 5, a rear passage constitution portion 7, and a passage constitution portion 6 between them. ing. The cover member 5, the passage configuration portion 7, and the passage configuration portion 6 can all be made of a light-transmitting material. 33 (a) is a rear view of the cover member 5, FIG. 33 (b) is a front view of the passage component 6, and FIG. 33 (c) is a front view of the passage component 7. 34A to 34D are, respectively, a VV line cross-sectional view, a VI-VI line cross-sectional view, a VII-VII line cross-sectional view, and a VIII-VIII line cross-sectional view of FIG. 31.

  The cover member 5 is a member that covers the front surface of the passage component 6, and can be used as, for example, a decorative member. The game ball passing through the back passage portion through the cover member 5 may be visible.

  The back portion of the cover member 5 has a plurality of attachment portions 5a having screw holes. The passage constituting portion 6 is a unit integrally including a plate-like attachment portion 14 and a portion constituting the passage portion, and the attachment portion 14 has a shaft 14e at a position corresponding to the attachment portion 5a. The cover member 5 is fixed to the passage constituting portion 6 by fitting the attachment portion 5a and the shaft 14e. The attachment portion 14 is fixed to the surface of the game board 201 with a screw or the like. The passage configuration unit 7 is a unit that integrally includes portions constituting the passage unit and the distribution unit, and is fixed to the back surface of the game board 201 with screws or the like. In the game board 201, an opening is formed at a portion where the passage is communicated between the passage constituting portion 6 and the passage constituting portion 7.

  In the case of this example, the channel | path structure part 6 has the channel | path part 10, the vertical part 12a, and the vertical part 13a. The passage configuration portion 7 includes a distribution portion 11, passage portions 12b and 12c, and passage portions 13b and 13c.

  The passage portion 10 and the inlet portion 10 a are located on the front side with respect to the attachment portion 14, and are therefore located on the near side of the surface of the game board 201.

  The distribution unit 11 is provided in the passage configuration unit 7 and is located on the back side with respect to the attachment unit 14, that is, on the back side from the surface of the game board 201. The game ball that has flowed down the game area 124 and entered the entrance 10 a is once guided to the distribution unit 11 on the back side of the game board 201. Since the distribution unit 11 is located behind the game board 201, it may be difficult to visually recognize the distribution of the game balls from the player, and the expectation of the distribution direction may be improved. In some cases, it may be difficult to perform an action.

  A movable body 40 that is a movable sorting member is disposed in the sorting unit 11. The game balls that have passed through the passage 10 abut against the movable body 40 and are distributed to the left and right. FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are explanatory diagrams of the movable body 40. The movable body 40 has a structure similar to that of the movable body 33 described with reference to FIG. 29, and is a passive one that rotates using the bias of the game ball. Of course, instead of the movable body 33, an active movable body or a fixed distribution member may be employed.

  The movable body 40 is a sorting member that rotates around a rotation center axis 40a in the vertical direction, and concave portions 40b are provided side by side on the front side thereof. A rotation urging force is applied to the movable body 33 by the game ball coming into contact with the recess 40b. When the movable body 40 is at the position shown in FIG. 35A, the game balls are distributed to the right side, and when the movable body 40 is at the position shown in FIG. 35B, the game balls are distributed to the left side. The game balls are distributed to the left and right in order. The movable body 40 is also provided with a blocking mechanism that prevents it from resting at a position where it cannot be sorted, and a magnet 40c is disposed on the back side thereof, and repels the magnet 40c as shown in FIG. A magnet 41 is disposed below the magnet 41.

  Returning to FIGS. 31 to 34, of the passage portion 12, the vertical portion 12 a is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14 in the passage constitution portion 6, and is therefore located on the nearer side than the surface of the game board 201. ing. Of the passage portion 12, the passage portions 12 b and 12 c are mainly provided in the passage configuration portion 7, and are therefore located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. The first sphere detection sensor SR1 is disposed at the lower end of the passage portion 12c, and the area inside the first sphere detection sensor SR1 is a start winning area R1.

  Of the passage portion 13, the vertical portion 13 a is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14 in the passage constituting portion 6, and is therefore located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. Of the passage portion 13, the passage portions 13 b and 13 c are mainly provided in the passage constitution portion 7, and are therefore located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. A second sphere detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the lower end of the passage portion 13c, and an area inside the second sphere detection sensor SR2 is a start winning area R2.

  In the case of this example, the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 constitute a cylindrical body having a square cross section (here, square). A rib 10 f that guides the game ball to the sorting unit 11 is formed in the passage unit 10.

  The passage portion 12 is provided with a partition wall 12g that divides the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 12c in the vertical direction, and a rib 12h that guides the passage of the game ball. The rib 12f may guide the game ball so as to pass through the center of the passage. Also, ribs 12f that guide the passage of the game ball are formed in the vertical portion 12a. An opening OP1 is formed in each of the side portions S21 and S22 of the vertical portion 12a, and an internal space immediately below the opening OP1 serves as a first start winning opening 230. Around the opening OP1, an opening is formed in the mounting portion 14 so as to be continuous with the opening OP1.

  The passage portion 13 is also provided with a partition wall 13g that vertically divides the passage portion 13b and the passage portion 13c, and a rib 13h that guides the passage of the game ball. The rib 13f may guide the game ball so as to pass through the center of the passage. Also, ribs 13f for guiding the passage of the game ball are formed in the vertical portion 13a. An opening OP2 is formed in each of the side portions S31 and S32 of the vertical portion 13a, and the internal space immediately below the opening portion OP2 is a second fixed start winning opening 233. Around the opening OP2, an opening is formed in the mounting portion 14 so as to be continuous with the opening OP2.

  Refer to FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b). FIG. 36 (a) is a front view of the passage constituting unit 6 and illustrates a virtual vertical line CL and regions R11 and R12. FIG. 36 (b) shows the distribution part 11 and the passage parts 12 and 13 in the passage constituting part 7.

  Of the side parts of the vertical part 12a, the side part farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side part S21, and among the side parts of the vertical part 13a, the side part farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side part S31. Comparing the positions of the side part S21 and the side part S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL, the side part S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side part S21, and accordingly, the vertical part 13a is closer to the vertical part 12a. The direction is biased toward the virtual vertical line CL. The region R11 is a space that includes the movable body 40, and the region R12 is a space that extends the region R11 downward as described above and further extends in the depth direction of the game board 201.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The whole vertical portion 13a may overlap with the region R12, but in this example, a portion thereof overlaps. Although the vertical portion 12a may overlap the region R12, in the present example, the vertical portion 12a is located at a position that does not overlap. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is biased toward the virtual vertical line CL rather than the vertical portion 12a. By bringing the vertical portion 13a out of the vertical portions 12a and 13a toward the vertical portion 12a side, the passage structure 1 may be compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom in arrangement of other configurations may be improved. Also, replacement and maintenance may be facilitated.

  The passage portion 12b includes a bulging portion 12b 'that bulges downward. In some cases, it is difficult for the game ball to be clogged by providing the bulging portion 12b 'to widen the passage width. The passage portion 12c has a curved shape biased inward at the outlet portion 12c ', and there are cases where the degree of freedom of arrangement of peripheral components can be improved.

  The manner of passing the game ball in the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 will be described. This is the same passage manner as the example illustrated in FIGS. 25 (c) and 25 (d).

  That is, the game balls that have entered the passage portion 10 from the entrance portion 10 a are guided to the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201), and are distributed to the left or right in the sorting portion 11.

  When it is distributed to the left, it enters the passage portion 12b of the passage portion 12. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12b is guided to the vertical portion 12a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201). The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 12a is again guided to the passage portion 12c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201). The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12c falls downward and is discharged out of the passage, and the passage is detected by the first ball detection sensor SR1 in the middle thereof.

  When it is distributed to the right, it enters the passage portion 13 b of the passage portion 13. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13b is guided to the vertical portion 13a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201). The passage portion 13b includes a portion that does not overlap the region R12, and the game ball passes while moving to a position that does not overlap the region R12. The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 13a is again guided to the passage portion 13c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201). The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13c falls downward and is discharged out of the passage, and the passage is detected by the second ball detection sensor SR2 in the middle thereof.

  Thus, in this example, since the game ball passes through the passage portion 13 while meandering in the depth direction, it is difficult to visually recognize the passing mode of the game ball from the player, and the expectation for the passing direction may be improved. Further, since the game ball passes through the back side of the game board 201, it may be possible to make it difficult to perform cheating.

  In this example, in both the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13, the game ball passes through the passage portion while meandering in the depth direction, but one of them is a passage portion that does not meander in the depth direction (for example, 15 to 19). Each example shown in FIGS. 15 to 30 can also be applied to this example.

  Next, the rib 14f and the opening OP2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (b), 37, and 38. FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line IX-IX of FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 37 (b) is an explanatory view of the manner in which the game ball enters the opening OP2, and FIG. 37 (c) is the view of FIG. It is XX sectional drawing.

In the case of this example, the route of the game ball that wins the second fixed start winning port 233 is (1) when the game ball enters the entrance portion 10a and is distributed to the passage portion 13, (2) the side portion S32 side When a game ball enters the opening OP2 of
(3) When a game ball enters the opening OP2 on the side S31 side,
There are three patterns. In the case of (2), since there is a difference in height between the opening OP1 and the opening OP2, the game ball in the passage portion 12 may jump out of the opening OP1 and enter the opening OP2. In the case of (1), the game ball may jump out of the opening OP2 and may not win the second fixed start winning opening 233.

  When the winning patterns of (2) and (3) are assumed to be game characteristics that are positioned as irregular winnings, it is possible to structurally reduce the probability that a game ball enters the second fixed start winning opening 233.

  In the case of this example, it is difficult for the game ball to reach the opening OP2 on the side S32 side due to the presence of the vertical portion 12a and the like. On the other hand, when the player hits right, the game ball may reach the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. Therefore, a rib 14f is provided obliquely above the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the provision of the rib 14f makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. Further, by making the distance L between the lower end of the rib 14f and the lower end of the opening OP2 shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball enters the opening OP2 from the side (right side) of the opening OP2. It will also be difficult. Since the rib 14f is not provided on the side S32 side, the game ball is easier to enter than the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. However, as already described, the game ball enters the opening OP2 on the side S32 side. Since it is difficult to reach, the probability that the game ball enters the first opening OP2 on the side S32 side is low.

  Next, reference will be made to FIG. As already described, the rib 13f is provided in the vertical portion 13a. In FIG. 37 (c), the diameter of the game ball is p, and the distance from the surface of the mounting portion 14 to the opening end on the near side of the side portion S31 or S32 in the opening OP2 is c, and from the surface of the mounting portion 14 The distance to the rib 13f is b, the distance from the left-right end of the opening of the opening OP2 provided in the attachment part 14 to the side S31 or S32 is a, and the left-right direction of the opening provided in the attachment 14 The distance from the end to the rib 13f is d, and the distance from the back end of the opening OP2 formed in the side S31 or S32 to the rib 13f is e. The dimensional relationship is c≈d> p> e> b.

  Accordingly, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the opening OP2 horizontally in the left-right direction due to interference with the ribs 13f, and the game ball moves relative to the game board 201 so as to pass through the gap of the distance d. It is possible to enter by entering diagonally (leaving up). That is, the rib 13f functions as a game ball entry blocking portion. Due to the combination of the rib 13f and the rib 14f, the probability that the game ball enters the opening OP2 on the side S31 side is extremely low.

<Guide structure for game balls>
A guide for guiding or guiding the game ball may be provided in at least a part of the passage portion of the passage structure 1. FIG. 38A is a perspective view schematically showing a passage portion PSG showing an example. 38B is a cross-sectional view taken along line YY in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38C is a cross-sectional view taken along line ZZ in FIG. 38B.

  The passage part PSG forms a cylindrical body having a square cross section (here, square), and a sphere detection sensor SR is disposed at a lower end part on the outlet side thereof. Of the inner walls of the passage part PSG, ribs RB are formed on opposing inner walls. The rib RB of the present example protrudes toward the opposing inner wall and extends in the lateral direction. Further, the ribs RB are arranged with their positions in the vertical direction shifted. The inner wall that forms the rib RB may be an inner wall that faces the depth direction of the pachinko machine 100 or an inner wall that faces the left-right direction.

  FIG. 38D illustrates the flow-down mode of the game ball in the passage part PSG. Since the game ball interferes with the rib RB in the process of flowing down, the game ball flows down in the passage part PSG while being guided back and forth or left and right according to the arrangement of the rib RB.

<Summary of Embodiment>
A1. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game area where game balls can flow down (eg 124);
A game board (for example, 201) provided with the game area;
Passage means (for example, 1) provided in the game board;
A game machine equipped with
The passage means is a means provided with a first passage portion (for example, 10) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The passage means is a means provided with a distribution portion (for example, 11) capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the first passage portion to any one of a plurality of passage portions (for example, 12, 13). Yes,
The plurality of passage portions are passage portions through which game balls that have passed through the first passage portion can pass,
One of the plurality of passage portions is a second passage portion (for example, 12),
One of the plurality of passage portions is a third passage portion (for example, 13),
The second passage portion is a passage portion including at least a second vertical portion (for example, 12a),
The third passage portion is a passage portion including at least a third vertical portion (for example, 13a),
The distribution unit is a distribution unit located in a first region (for example, R11) in the passage means,
The second vertical portion is a vertical portion having a plurality of side portions (for example, S21, S22) including one side portion (hereinafter referred to as “second side portion”) (for example, S21),
The third vertical portion is a vertical portion having a plurality of side portions (for example, S31, S32) including one side portion (hereinafter referred to as “third side portion”) (for example, S31),
The second side portion is a side portion farthest from a virtual vertical line (for example, CL) among the plurality of side portions of the second vertical portion,
The third side portion is a side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line among the plurality of side portions of the third vertical portion,
The virtual vertical line is a virtual vertical line that passes through the center in the width direction of the distribution unit,
The third side portion is a side portion closer to the virtual vertical line than the second side portion,
The third vertical portion is a vertical portion at least partially overlapping a second region (for example, R12),
The second region is a region obtained by extending the first region downward and further expanding in the normal direction of the game board.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic passage means. In addition, one of the passage portions may be biased to one side, the degree of freedom of arrangement of surrounding parts may be improved, the passage means may be compact, and replacement and maintenance may be facilitated.

A2. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second passage portion includes a portion on the back side of the surface of the game board (for example, 12b and 12c in FIGS. 25, 34, etc.) and a portion on the near side of the surface of the game board (for example, FIG. 25, A passage portion including 12a) of FIG.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the goto action may be difficult.

A3. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third passage portion includes a portion on the back side of the surface of the game board (for example, 13b and 13c in FIG. 25, FIG. 34, etc.) and a portion on the near side of the surface of the game board (for example, FIG. 25, 34b including 13b, 13c) of FIG.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the goto action may be difficult.

A4. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least one side portion (for example, S21, S22) among the plurality of side portions of the second passage portion is a side portion having an opening (for example, OP1) through which a game ball can pass.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game is improved by causing an irregular winning. The opening part may function as an entrance part of the game ball or may function as an exit part.

A5. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least one side portion (for example, S31, S32) among the plurality of side portions of the third passage portion is a side portion having an opening (for example, OP2) through which a game ball can pass.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game is improved by causing an irregular winning. The opening part may function as an entrance part of the game ball or may function as an exit part.

A6. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third passage portion is a passage portion including a portion (for example, 13b) that does not overlap the second region.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the ball with thread may be difficult to bend by bending the path of the game ball.

A7. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A second detecting means (for example, SR1) capable of detecting a game ball passing through or passing through the second passage portion;
A second symbol variation unit capable of executing a second symbol variation display (for example, the variation display of the special diagram 1) when a game ball is detected by the second detection unit;
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where it is possible to give the player an interest in the movement of the game ball by providing the detection means and associating the symbol variation display with the detection result.

A8. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A third detecting means (for example, SR2) capable of detecting the game ball passing through or passing through the third passage portion;
A third symbol variation means capable of executing a third symbol variation display (for example, the variation display of the special diagram 2) when a game ball is detected by the third detector;
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where it is possible to give the player an interest in the movement of the game ball by providing the detection means and associating the symbol variation display with the detection result.

A9. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The distribution unit is a distribution unit (for example, 11 in FIG. 25, FIG. 34, etc.) located on the back side of the surface of the game board.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the distribution unit may be difficult to see, and the goto action on the distribution unit may be difficult.

  When A2 and A3 are combined, there may be a case where it is possible to achieve both space saving of the passage portion in the game area and difficulty of the goto action.

  When the above A2 to A5 are combined, the passage portion may have a complicated shape, and the goto action may be difficult. Even if the passage portion has a complicated shape, the presence of the opening portion may make it difficult to cause clogging.

A10.
A game area where game balls can flow down (eg 124);
A game board (for example, 201) provided with the game area;
Passage means (for example, 1) provided in the game board;
A game machine equipped with
The passage means is a means provided with a first passage portion (for example, 10) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The passage means is a means provided with a distribution portion (for example, 11) capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the first passage portion to any one of a plurality of passage portions (for example, 12, 13). Yes,
The plurality of passage portions are passage portions through which game balls that have passed through the first passage portion can pass,
One of the plurality of passage portions is a second passage portion (for example, 12),
One of the plurality of passage portions is a third passage portion (for example, 13),
The second passage portion is a passage portion including at least a second outlet portion (for example, an end portion of 12c),
The third passage portion is a passage portion including at least a third outlet portion (for example, an end portion of 13c),
The distribution unit is a distribution unit located in a first region (for example, R11) in the passage means,
The third outlet portion is an outlet portion closer to a virtual vertical line (for example, CL) than the second outlet portion,
The virtual vertical line is a virtual vertical line that passes through the center in the width direction of the distribution unit,
The third outlet portion is an outlet portion at least partially overlapping with a second region (for example, R12),
The second region is a region obtained by extending the first region downward and further expanding in the normal direction of the game board.
It is characterized by that.

  Further, the following configuration can also be adopted.

  The first region may be a space between the first passage portion and the second and third passage portions and including the distribution portion. The region through which the game ball passes while the game ball is touching the sorting member may be the first region. The range in which the sorting member operates may be the first region.

  The distribution unit may include a distribution member. The distribution member may distribute the game balls according to the urging force (for example, speed or weight) of the game balls. The distribution member may operate perpendicular to the game board. The distribution member may be prevented from being stopped at a specific position by a magnet. The sorting member may be a fixed member or a movable member. The distribution member may distribute game balls according to shape. The distributing member may be a constant movement at all times from power-on, or may be an electric type. The sorting member may be a rotating body (for example, a croon) in which a hole corresponding to the passage is formed.

  The passage portion may be a space through which a game ball can pass and a wall constituting the space. The second and third side portions may be wall portions constituting the vertical portion.

  The third vertical portion may be shorter in overall length (for example, the length in the vertical direction) than the second vertical portion. The total length of the second vertical portion may be shorter than that of the third vertical portion. The second passage portion may have a plurality of vertical portions, and the third passage portion may have a plurality of vertical portions.

  Each of the second passage portion and the third passage portion may have a portion overlapping the second region. The second passage portion and the third passage portion may have a symmetrical shape.

  An illumination board may be attached to the back (rear side) of the second passage portion and the third passage portion. The back side (rear side) of the passage means may be lens cut, or the effect light emitting element may illuminate the lens cut and diffuse light.

  The passage portion may have a curved portion. The passage means may have a cover member. The cover member may have a light-transmitting property capable of visually recognizing a game ball passing through the passage portion. The cover member may have a light-transmitting property that allows a game ball to pass through in a part of the region.

  When there are passage portions on the front side and the back side of the game board, the passages may be biased not only on the front side but also on the back side.

  The second passage portion and the third passage portion may have different passage lengths or the same passage length. Said 2nd, 3rd channel | path part may have a part comprised with the game nail which continues in the width | variety which a game ball cannot pass.

  A guide (for example, a rib) for guiding or guiding the game ball may be provided in the passage portion (for example, FIG. 38).

  The opening of the second passage portion may have a higher probability that a game ball enters than the opening of the third passage portion. A rib may be provided adjacent to the opening. The rib may be on the outside or inside of the passage portion.

  The opening of the second passage may be different in the vertical position from the opening of the third passage. The opening portion of the second passage portion may be provided on each side portion that is separated from the left and right. The opening of the third passage portion may be provided on each of the side portions separated from each other on the left and right. A game ball that has come out of the second opening may enter the third opening.

  At least one of the second and third detection means may be on the back side of the game board. At least one of the second and third detection means may be on the front side of the game board.

  The distribution unit may alternately distribute game balls to the second passage unit and the third passage unit. The passage means may be one in which game balls are alternately detected by the second and third detection means.

  The distribution unit may continuously distribute the game balls to the same passage unit.

  The jackpot with the second special symbol may have more benefits to the player than the jackpot with the first special symbol. The jackpot with the first special symbol may have more benefits to the player than the jackpot with the second special symbol. The normal symbol may be changed by detection by the second detection means. The normal symbol may be changed by the detection of the third detection means.

  The distribution unit may distribute game balls to the two passage units. The distribution unit may distribute game balls to the three passage units.

<Embodiment B>
<Overall configuration>
The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launch handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of various production devices by the player's operation, and a chance button for causing the chance button 136 to emit light , A ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, a return operation button 142 for giving a card balance return instruction to the card unit, And a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  40 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 39 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 41 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  A display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124. The display area of the display device 208 includes a display area R1 capable of executing the first display. The display area R1 may be the entire display area of the display device 208, but is a partial area in the present embodiment. In the case of the present embodiment, the first display includes a variable display of decorative symbols.

  In the lower right area of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol hold lamp 218 are displayed. In addition, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The display area R1 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208d. The display area 208c displays different decorative designs, and the effect display area 208d can display an image used for the effect.

  Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the display apparatus 208, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix display device, 7 Other display devices including a segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a first special figure start opening 230, second special figure start openings 231 and 232, and a variable winning opening 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the case of this embodiment, the 1st special figure starting port 230 and the 2nd special figure starting port 231 are provided in the starting port unit U1. Like the passage structure described in the embodiment A, the start opening unit U1 constitutes a passage unit that distributes the game balls that have entered from the upper part to the first special figure start opening 230 or the second special figure start opening 231.

  In the case of this embodiment, the variable prize opening 234 and 235 are provided in the variable prize opening unit U2.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is placed on the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second starting port 232 is arranged below the general drawing starting port 228. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 231 or 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is placed on the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 231 or 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a big winning opening or an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 235 also has a mechanism that can be opened and closed. During closing, it is impossible to enter a ball. For example, when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is opened for a certain time (for example, 0.3 seconds) and closed. As a result, there is a case where V is won.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a game nail 238 are arranged, and any winning opening or starting point is provided at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for discharging a ball that has not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the start opening (first special figure start opening 230, second special figure start opening 231 and 232), or does not win any winning opening or start opening, or only passes through the normal drawing start opening 228 To reach the outlet 240.

  The game board 200 is also provided with a movable body 1 to a movable body 3 for production. The movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are positioned above the display area R1 at the initial position, and the movable body 3 is positioned below the display area R1 at the initial position. In the initial position, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100, and the movable body 1 is located on the front side and the movable body 2 is located on the rear side. A cover 203 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 3. When the cover 203 is in the initial position, only the upper portion of the movable body 3 is exposed from the cover 203, and portions other than the upper portion are covered with the cover 203 and the like. . Therefore, when it is in the initial position, it is difficult to visually recognize the part other than the upper part of the movable body 3 as compared with the upper part, and when the cover 203 is formed of a non-translucent member, the part other than the upper part is not visible. . On the other hand, by configuring the cover 203 with a light-transmitting member, when the movable body 3 emits light, it is also possible to make the light emission of the portion covered with the cover 203 visible. It may be possible to indicate to the player that the player is hiding in 203.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 is received (this circuit has 2 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a high-probability medium lamp) 222) and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, such as the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the counter circuit 318 calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 231 and 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting ports 231 and 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a chance button 136. A chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 are read out. A VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the display device 208 is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of various actuators 224 such as motors provided on the movable bodies 1 to 3, a position detection sensor provided on the movable bodies 1 to 3, and the like. The sensor circuit 518 for outputting detection signals from the various sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502, the game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and the game table frame lamp 542 are controlled. A gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540, and a gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 and a gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540, which are connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication. Yes.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43A to 43C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 43 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball enters the second special figure start port 231, 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected the above. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do.

  These “variable display of special figure 1” and “variable display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of a symbol variable display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display, hereinafter, a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” until the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The display is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 43 (a) shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 43 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, “Special Figure G”. By providing “Special Figure H” and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the display device 208 are displayed. The display is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “decorative display of decorative design”. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 41B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 43 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 44 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment). 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step SA03. If the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step returns. Proceed to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption), and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal).

  If the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state.

  That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power recovery command, the normal return command is the first command in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step SA15, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step SB03, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times.

  For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 42, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step SB05, information on presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234 or 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 231 or 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step SB07 and step SB09, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated.

  For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it.

  Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step SB13, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step SB15, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228 are won, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 231, 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  If a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 231, 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is selected. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the variable winning opening 234, 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234, 235 is stored in each winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step SB21, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 43 (c)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 43 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB23.

  In step SB23, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB25). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 43 (a) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the probability variation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the first off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In order to set the special region 2 in operation in the setting area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is started is displayed. Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information.

  Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB27.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step SB27). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed first (step SB29), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) (Step SB31).

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variable game by the display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure start ports 231 and 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 231, 232, variable winning ports 234, 235 Including the presence or absence of winning a prize.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set.

  In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games that are on hold is set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games that are on hold is set.

  In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step SB33, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the bottom pan full error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43. When the low voltage signal is off (power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  In step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of the strobe interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step SC01 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in SC01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  In step SC05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in SC07, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed. In step SC13, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in SC09, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step SC15, when there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in SC09, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC <b> 17, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in SC <b> 09, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step SC19, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in SC09, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in SC09, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step SE01 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC19, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step SC13 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step SF05, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11. Wait for input. In step SF11, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step SG01 of FIG. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in SG01. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step SG03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05.

  In step SG05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step SG09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in SG07, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step SG 11, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step SI01 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Director>
The configuration of the rendering device, particularly the configuration of the movable body 1 to the movable body 3 and the moving mechanism thereof will be described. First, the overall configuration of the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 200, FIG. 49 is a rear view of the game board 200, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 includes a front unit 201A, a game board 201B, and a rear unit 201C that are stacked in order from the front side in the depth direction.

  The front unit 201A is a unit that constitutes the game area 124 and the like, and includes a winning opening, a starting opening unit U1, a variable winning opening unit U2, rails, symbol display devices, nails, and the like. It is a plate-like support member that supports the front unit 201A.

  The game board 201B is formed of, for example, a transparent resin board or a wooden board, and an opening for exposing the effect device behind is formed at the center. At the lower side of the opening, the cover 203 has a protruding portion 203a that protrudes to the front side, and restricts the game balls that flow down the game area 124 from jumping back from the opening of the game board 201B. ing.

  FIG. 51 is a partially exploded rear view of the game board 200, and mainly shows the configuration provided on the rear side of the game board 201B. Ball passage units RT1 to RT3 are formed on the back surface of the game board 201B. The ball path unit RT1 is a path for discharging game balls that have won a plurality of general winning holes 226 located on the left side of the game area 124 from the game area 124, and the ball path unit RT2 is provided at the second special figure starting port 232. A path for discharging the winning game balls from the game area 124, and the ball path unit RT3 is a path for discharging the game balls won in the general prize opening 226 provided in the variable prize opening unit U2 from the game area 124. is there.

  The ball passage units RT1 and RT2 have upper walls 201c and 201d inclined toward the out port 240, and the game balls that have entered the back side of the game board 201B over the projecting portion 203a are moved to the upper walls 201c and 201d. This makes it easy to collect around the back portion of the out port 240 and discharge it.

  A plurality of holes 201a for fixing a part of the configuration of the front unit 201A with screws are formed in the game board 201B, and a part of the configuration of the front unit 201A is fixed by inserting the screws into the holes 201a. . An annular rib 201b is formed around some of the holes 201a. A part of the rib 201b serves as an inclined wall for guiding the screw to the hole 201a, so that the screw can be easily aligned with the hole 201a. The rib 201b is partially a vertical wall, but may be an inclined wall over the entire circumference.

  The rear unit 201C will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50 and FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 201C. The rear unit 201C is a unit that mainly includes a rendering device, and is a support member 7A that is a rectangular frame having an opening at the center, and a rectangular frame that is fixed behind the support member 7A and has an opening at the center. And a support member 7B.

  The movable body 1 is supported on the support member 7 </ b> A via the moving mechanism 4. Although the moving mode of the movable body 1 can be any of up / down, left / right, diagonal, rotation, and rotation, in the case of this embodiment, the moving mechanism 4 is a lifting mechanism that moves the movable body 1 up and down. is there. The moving mechanism 4 includes a drive mechanism 4A supported on the left side of the opening of the support member 7A and a guide mechanism (driven mechanism) 4B supported on the right side. The drive mechanism 4A and the guide mechanism 4B are separated in the left-right direction. And it is extended in the up-down direction in parallel with each other. The movable body 1 is installed between these mechanisms 4A and 4B. A decoration unit 8A is disposed on the front side of the drive mechanism 4A, and a decoration unit 8B is disposed on the front side of the guide mechanism 4B. The decoration units 8A and 8B perform effects using light.

  The movable body 3 is supported on the support member 7 </ b> A via the moving mechanism 6. Although the moving mode of the movable body 3 can be any of up / down, left / right, diagonal, rotation, and rotation, in the case of this embodiment, the moving mechanism 6 is an elevating mechanism that moves the movable body 3 up and down. is there. The moving mechanism 6 is supported below the opening of the support member 7A.

  The movable body 2 is supported on the support member 7B via the moving mechanism 5. As the moving mode of the movable body 2, any of up / down, left / right, diagonal, rotation, and rotation can be adopted. However, in this embodiment, the moving mechanism 5 is a lifting mechanism that moves the movable body 2 up and down. is there. The moving mechanism 5 includes a drive mechanism 5A supported on the left side of the opening of the support member 7B and a guide mechanism (driven mechanism) 5B supported on the right side. The drive mechanism 5A and the guide mechanism 5B are separated in the left-right direction. And it is extended in the up-down direction in parallel with each other. The movable body 2 is installed between these mechanisms 5A and 5B.

  With such a configuration, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are arranged so as to be shifted in the depth direction and can be overlapped with each other in the depth direction. Thereby, it may be easy to ensure the movable space of each movable body.

  In the case of this embodiment, the moving mechanism 4 and the moving mechanism 5 have the same configuration, and the driving mechanism 5A and the guiding mechanism 5B overlap in the depth direction behind the driving mechanism 4A and 4B, respectively. Is located. With such a configuration, the moving mechanism 4 and the moving mechanism 5 may be able to employ the same mechanism. On the other hand, since the drive mechanisms 4A and 5A are mechanisms including a motor or the like as will be described later, the thickness in the depth direction may increase. Therefore, it is possible to employ a configuration in which the guide mechanism 5B is positioned behind the drive mechanism 4A and the drive mechanism 5B is positioned behind the guide mechanism 4B so as to overlap each other in the depth direction. The installation space may be reduced in the depth direction.

  The display device 208 is fixed to the back surface of the support member 7B, and the substrate case unit 7C is further fixed. The substrate case unit 7C can accommodate the moving mechanisms 4 and 5, the decorative units 8A and 8B, the substrate related to the display device 208, and other substrates.

  With the above configuration, the display area of the display device 208 is disposed behind the movable bodies 1 to 3. Although the movable bodies 1 to 3 and the display area of the display device 208 may always overlap in the depth direction, the movable bodies 1 to 3 can be moved to positions that overlap the display area of the display device 208 and the depth direction, respectively. Conversely, at least some of the movable bodies 1 to 3 may be arranged so as not to overlap the display area of the display device 208 in the depth direction at all times.

<Movement mechanism 4, movable body 1 and decoration units 8A, 8B>
The moving mechanism 4, the movable body 1, and the decoration units 8A and 8B will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 are exploded perspective views of the moving mechanism 4. FIG. 55 is a detailed view of a part of the drive mechanism 4A. FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 1.

<Movement mechanism 4>
The drive mechanism 4A of the moving mechanism 4 is fixed to the left side of the support member 7A, and the guide mechanism 4B is fixed to the right side of the support member 7A. A decorative member 70 is fixed to the upper side portion of the support member 7A.

  The driving mechanism 4A is a mechanism that generates a driving force for moving the movable body 1 up and down, and various driving force transmission mechanisms such as a belt transmission mechanism and a ball screw mechanism can be employed. In this case, a rack-pinion mechanism using the motor 43A as a drive source is employed.

  The drive mechanism 4A includes a base portion 40A and a cover portion 40B. The base portion 40A is a cover body that covers the mechanism disposed in the space between the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B from the rear side, and the cover portion 40B is a cover body that covers from the front side. The motor 43A is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 40A. An output shaft of the motor 43A passes through the base portion 40A and is fixed to a gear 41B disposed in a space between the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B. The gear 41B meshes with a gear 41A that is rotatably supported by the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B, and the gear 41A meshes with a gear 41C that is rotatably supported by the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B.

  The gears 41 </ b> A to 41 </ b> C are all spur gears, but the gear 41 </ b> C has a missing tooth portion 41 a in which a part of the peripheral tooth portion is missing, and the side surface thereof protrudes in parallel with the rotation axis direction. It has an engaging part 41b. The gear 41C meshes with the rack portion 44a of the movable member 44A. The movable member 44A is supported by a slide rail 44B extending in the vertical direction so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide rail 44B includes a fixed rail 44e fixed to the base portion 40A, an intermediate rail 44d slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the fixed rail 44e, and a movable rail 44c slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the intermediate rail 44d. The movable member 44A is supported by the movable rail 44c.

  The rack portions 44a of the movable member 44A are arranged in the vertical direction, and move in the vertical direction by the rotation of the gear 41C driven by the motor 43A. In FIG. 55, when the gear 41C rotates in the arrow d1 direction (counterclockwise), the movable member 44A rises, and when the gear 41C rotates in the arrow d2 direction (clockwise), the movable member 44A descends. The movable member 44A supports the left end portion of the movable body 1 via the bracket 44b, and the movable body 1 basically operates in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 41C. As shown in FIG. 55, when the rack portion 44a and the toothless portion 41a face each other, the drive transmission between the movable member 44A and the gear 41C is interrupted, and the movable member 44A is in a free-falling state. The free fall of the movable member 44A means the free fall of the movable body 1. In this case, the movable body 1 operates without being interlocked with the rotation of the gear 41C. A buffer material 44f is disposed below the base portion 40A, and defines the lower limit of free fall of the movable member 44A (that is, the lower limit of free fall of the movable body 1), and the impact during the fall is alleviated.

  The base portion 40A also supports sensors 43B and 43C that detect the position of the movable body 1. The sensors 43B and 43C may be any sensors, but in the case of the present embodiment, they are optical sensors (photo interrupters) that detect the detection piece 44g provided on the movable member 44A. The sensor 43B and the sensor 43C are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, the sensor 43B detects whether or not the movable body 1 is located at the initial position, and the sensor 43C detects that the movable body 1 is at the lower limit position (lowering). It is also detected whether or not it is located. The harness 43a is a wiring for the sensors 43B, 43C and the like.

  The base portion 40 </ b> A further includes a regulation unit 42 that can regulate the operation of the movable body 1. Any operation may be performed, but in the case of the present embodiment, the lowering (downward movement) of the movable body 1 can be regulated by the regulation unit 42. Although the lowering of the movable body 1 can be regulated by the motor 43A, in this embodiment, the regulation unit 42 is provided separately from the motor 43A, so that the motor 43A is de-energized, and the movable body 1 is lowered by power saving. It can be regulated.

  The restriction unit 42 includes an actuator 42A as a drive source. The actuator 42A may be a motor, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is a solenoid, particularly a pull solenoid, and raises the plunger 42a when energized (excited state). The plunger 42a is provided with a return spring 42D that constantly urges the plunger 42a downward.

  The regulation unit 42 also includes a regulation member 42C. The restricting member 42C is rotatably supported by the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B via a shaft 42c, and includes a restricting portion 42d that can be engaged with the engaging portion 41b of the gear 41C. An operation member 42B connected to the regulating member 42C via a pin 42b is attached to the lower end portion of the plunger 42a. The pin 42b is loosely fitted to the regulating member 42C. When the operation member 42B moves up and down by the vertical movement of the plunger 42a, the regulating member 42c rotates around the shaft 42c.

  The regulation operation will be described with reference to FIG. When the actuator 42A is not energized (non-excited state), the restricting member 42C is positioned at the restricting position by the urging of the return spring 42D. This restricting position is a position where the restricting portion 42d of the restricting member 42C can engage with the engaging portion 41b of the gear 41C.

  When the gear 41C rotates in the direction of the arrow d2, the rotation of the gear 41C is restricted by the engagement between the restricting portion 42d and the engaging portion 41b. At the time of restriction, the reaction force input from the engaging part 41b to the restriction part 42d is generally an upward reaction force passing through the shaft 42c, so that the rotation of the gear 41C can be restricted only by the urging force of the return spring 42D. It is. Thus, the operating range of the gear 41C is restricted. Although the rotation of the gear 41C indicated by the arrow d2 is restricted, this rotation direction is a rotation direction for lowering the movable body 1, and thus the lowering of the movable body 1 can be restricted by the restriction unit 42. In the case of the present embodiment, the lowering of the movable body 1 can be restricted at the initial position by the restriction unit 42. That is, the movable body 1 can be maintained at the initial position without energizing the motor 43A.

  When the gear 41C rotates in the direction of the arrow d1, the engaging portion 41b comes into contact with the side portion SD of the regulating member 42C. Since the abutting direction is a circumferential direction with respect to the shaft 42c, the regulating member 42C rotates in the direction of the arrow d3 against the urging force of the return spring 42D and is located at the non-regulating position (release position). The rotation of the gear 41C in the arrow d1 direction is not restricted. This rotational direction is a rotational direction that raises the movable body 1. Therefore, when the motor 43 </ b> A is driven to raise the movable body 1 from the initial position, the operation of the movable body 1 is not restricted by the restriction unit 42.

  Next, the restriction release operation will be described. When the restricting member 42C is located at the restricting position, when the actuator 42A is energized (excited), the plunger 42a is pulled up, thereby pulling up the operating member 42B against the urging force of the return spring 42D. For this reason, the regulating member 42C rotates in the direction of the arrow d3 and is located at the non-regulating position (release position). When the restricting member 42C rotates in the direction of the arrow d3, the engagement between the engaging portion 41b and the restricting portion 42d is released, the rotation restriction of the gear 41C is released, and the lowering restriction of the movable body 1 is released. . Therefore, the movable body 1 can be lowered by rotating the gear 41C in the direction of the arrow d2 by driving the motor 43A.

  The operation member 42B is provided with an operation portion 42e protruding to the back side. The operation portion 42e is disposed so as to be operable from the back portion of the base portion 40A through the opening 40a formed in the base portion 40A. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can manually move the operation portion 42e in the vertical direction during maintenance or inspection, and thereby the regulating member 42C can be moved to the non-regulating position.

  The lowering of the movable body 1 can be selected from the lowering by driving the motor 43A and the free fall using the missing tooth portion 41a. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 1 is positioned at the maximum ascending position where the movable body 1 is lifted by a certain amount from the initial position, the positional relationship in which the missing tooth portion 41a and the rack portion 44a face each other, and the movable body 1 is free. Fall. Since the descent mode of the movable body 1 can be selected from descent by control and descent by free fall, there are cases where the production can be diversified.

  Next, the guide mechanism 4B will be described with reference to FIGS. The guide mechanism 4B is a mechanism that guides the vertical movement of the movable body 1 by supporting the right end portion of the movable body 1 and following the drive mechanism 4A.

  The drive mechanism 4B includes a base portion 45A and a cover portion 45B. The base portion 45A is a cover body that covers the mechanism disposed in the space between the base portion 45A and the cover portion 45B from the rear side, and the cover portion 45B is a cover body that covers from the front side.

  The base portion 45A is formed with two grooves 45b that support the shaft 46B in the vertical direction, and the shaft 46B is arranged with its axial direction as the vertical direction. The base portion 45A is also formed with a recess 45a that forms a moving space for the movable member 46A. The cover 45B is also formed with grooves and recesses similar to the grooves 45b and recesses 45a.

  The movable member 46A includes a base portion 46a and a cover portion 46b, and two sets of roller pairs 46d are rotatably supported in the internal space. The roller pair 46d is disposed so as to sandwich the shaft 46B, and the movable member 46A slides in the vertical direction by the guide of the shaft 46B.

  The movable member 46A supports the right end portion of the movable body 1 via a bracket 46c, and the movable member 46A moves following the operation of the movable body 1 by the drive mechanism 4A. A cushioning material 46e is disposed at the lower end of the recess 45a, and defines the lower limit of free fall of the movable member 46A (that is, the lower limit of free fall of the movable body 1), and the impact at the time of dropping is alleviated.

<Decoration units 8A, 8B>
The decoration units 8A and 8B will be described with reference to FIGS. These may make it difficult to see the moving mechanism 4, and may increase the game.

  The decoration unit 8A includes decoration parts 80a and 80b and a substrate 80e fixed to the cover part 40B as a configuration located on the front side of the drive mechanism 4A. A plurality of light emitting elements 80f (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 80e. The substrate 80e is covered with a lens member 80d, and the lens member 80d is further covered with a cover body 80c. The lens member 80d and the cover body 80c are translucent.

  The decoration unit 8A also includes a lens member 81a fixed to the base portion 40A and a substrate 81b supported by the lens member 81a as a configuration located on the right side of the drive mechanism 4A. A plurality of light emitting elements 81c (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 81b and covered with a lens member 81a. The lens member 81a has translucency.

  In some cases, the game can be excited by driving the light emitting elements 80f and 81c. Since the light emitting elements 80f and 81c are arranged in the vertical direction, an effect that emphasizes the movement of the movable body 1 by controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting elements 80f and 81c in accordance with the vertical movement of the movable body 1. You may be able to

  The decoration unit 8B has the same configuration as the decoration unit 8A (configuration corresponding to the decoration portions 80a and 80b, the substrate 80e, the lens member 80, and the cover body 80c) as a configuration positioned on the front side of the guide mechanism 4B. The illustration is omitted.

  The decoration unit 8B also includes a lens member 82a fixed to the base portion 45A and a substrate 82b supported by the lens member 82a as a configuration located on the left side of the guide mechanism 4B. A plurality of light emitting elements (not shown, for example, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 82b, and are covered with a lens member 82a. The lens member 82a has translucency. A wiring unit 82c is connected to the substrate 82b.

<Movable body 1>
The movable body 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 1 is a deformable movable object unit whose outer shape is deformed. The movable body 1 includes a base portion 10, movable portions 11, 12, and 14, and a structure body 16. The base portion 10 is a member extending in the left-right direction, and the drive mechanism 4A is connected to the left end portion thereof, and the guide mechanism 4B is connected to the right end portion thereof.

  The movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are provided so as to be displaceable with respect to the base part 10. Each of these may be provided with a unique drive source. However, in this embodiment, a single motor 15a is used as the drive source. The movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are configured to be displaceable in conjunction with each other, and the number of drive sources may be reduced.

  Gears 15e to 15h (spur gears) for transmitting the driving force of the motor 15a to the movable parts 11 and 12 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the base part 10. The gear 15e meshes with the gears 15f and 15h. The gear 15h meshes with the gear 15g. Further, on the back surface of the base portion 10, a relay substrate 17a, a cover 17b that covers the back portion thereof, a harness cover 17d that covers a harness 17c that is a wiring of the motor 15a and the like are provided.

  A support portion 10a that rotatably supports the movable portion 11 and a support portion 10b that rotatably supports the movable portion 12 are provided. The support portions 10a and 10b are circular concave portions with the rotation shafts 10a 'and 10b' fixed at the center, and a part of the peripheral wall is cut away. A part of the gear 15f enters the support part 10a through the notch in the peripheral wall of the support part 10a, and a part of the gear 15g enters the support part 10b through the notch in the peripheral wall of the support part 10b. I have entered.

  The movable portion 11 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 11a, a substrate 11c, a lens member 11e, and a cover body 11f. A spur gear-like gear portion 11b is formed integrally with the base portion 11a. A rotation shaft 10a 'is inserted into the center hole of the gear portion 11b, and the gear portion 11b is accommodated in the support portion 10a. The The gear part 11b arrange | positioned in the support part 10a meshes with the gear 15f. A plurality of light emitting elements 11d (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 11c. The plurality of light emitting elements 11 d are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 11. The lens member 11e covers the substrate 11c, and the cover body 11f covers the lens member 11e. The lens member 11e and the cover body 11f have translucency, but may have a non-transmissive portion in part.

  The movable portion 12 has a shape that is symmetrical to the movable portion 11 and is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 12a, a substrate 12c, a lens member 12e, and a cover body 12f. Has been. A spur gear-like gear portion 12b is formed integrally with the base portion 12a. A rotation shaft 10b 'is inserted into the center hole of the gear portion 12b, and the gear portion 12b is accommodated in the support portion 10b. The The gear part 12b arrange | positioned in the support part 10b meshes with the gear 15g. A plurality of light emitting elements 12d (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 12c. The plurality of light emitting elements 12 d are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 12. The lens member 12e covers the substrate 12c, and the cover body 12f covers the lens member 12e. The lens member 12e and the cover body 12f are translucent, but may have a non-transmissive portion in part.

  The movable portion 14 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 14a, a substrate 14e, a lens member 14g, and a cover body 14h. The substrate 14e is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 14a, and the lens member 14g has a left and right two-member configuration, and each member covers the substrate 14e. The cover body 14h is fixed to the front side of the base portion 14a and covers the lower portion of the base portion 14a and the lens member 14g. A plurality of light emitting elements 14f (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 14e. The plurality of light emitting elements 14 f are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 14. The lens member 14g and the cover body 14h have translucency, but may have a non-transmissive portion in part.

  The structure 16 includes a front base portion 16A and a rear base portion 16E. The front base portion 16 </ b> A is fixed to the base portion 10, and the structure 16 is supported by the base portion 10.

  The base portion 14a of the movable portion 14 includes a column portion 14b extending vertically, and the column portion 14b is supported so as to be vertically movable so as to be sandwiched between the front base portion 16A and the rear base portion 16E. The Specifically, the front base portion 16A is formed with a vertically extending groove 16a in which the column portion 14b slides, and the rear base portion 16E is in contact with the back surface of the column portion 14b at a position facing the groove 16a. A contact portion 16c is provided.

  A rack portion 14c is formed in the vertical direction on the side portion of the column portion 14b, and a detection piece 14d is formed on the upper portion of the column portion 14b. A sensor 18 for detecting the position of the movable portion 14 is attached to the rear base portion 16E. The sensor 18 may be any sensor, but in the case of the present embodiment, the sensor 18 is an optical sensor (photo interrupter) that detects the detection piece 14d, and detects whether or not the movable portion 14 is located at the initial position.

  A motor 15a is fixed to the back portion of the front base portion 16A. The motor 15a is, for example, a stepping motor. The output shaft of the motor 15a passes through the front base portion 16A and is fixed to a gear 15b located on the front side of the Maekawa base portion 16A. Gears 15c and 15d, which are spur gears, are rotatably supported on the front base portion 16A. The gear 15b meshes with the gear 15d, and the gear 15d meshes with the gear 15c. The front base portion 16A has a notch that exposes a part of the gear 15c to the back, and the gear 15c meshes with the rack portion 14c of the column portion 15b. Therefore, when the motor 15a is driven, the driving force is transmitted to the rack portion 14c via the gears 15b, 15d, and 15c, and the movable portion 14 is operated.

  A shaft 15d is also fixed to the gear 15c. The shaft 15d is rotatably supported by the front base portion 16A and passes through the rear base portion 16B and the base portion 10 and is fixed to the gear 15e. Therefore, the gear 15c and the gear 15e rotate integrally. Therefore, when the motor 15a is driven, the driving force is transmitted to the gear 15e through the gears 15b, 15d, and 15c, and further transmitted to the gear units 11b and 12b through the gears 15f to 15h. 12 is operated. Thus, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 operate in conjunction with a single motor 15a as a drive source. The movable parts 11 and 12 are located at the same position in the depth direction, and the movable part 14 is located at a position (front position) that is shifted in the depth direction with respect to the movable parts 11 and 12. In operation, the movable portions 11 and 12 do not overlap each other in the depth direction, but the movable portions 11 and 12 and the movable portion 14 may overlap in the depth direction.

  The structure 16 also includes a substrate 16B, a lens member 16C, and a cover body 16D. A plurality of light emitting elements 16b (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 16B. The plurality of light emitting elements 16b are arranged in a plane, and the structure 16 can emit light as a whole. The lens member 16C covers the substrate 16B, and the cover body 16D covers the lens member 16C. The cover body 16D can be provided with a decorative shape, pattern, and color. In the case of this embodiment, an eyeball-like shape is provided as shown in FIG.

<Movement mechanism 5 and movable body 2>
The moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 2.

<Move mechanism 5>
Although the moving mechanism 5 is partially different in shape and the like, it has the same configuration as the moving mechanism 4 and will be briefly described. The configuration of the moving mechanism 5 corresponding to the configuration of the moving mechanism 4 is given the same reference numeral by replacing the head 4 with 5. The matters described for the moving mechanism 4 can be applied to the moving mechanism 5 as appropriate. The drive mechanism 5A of the moving mechanism 5 is fixed to the left side of the support member 7B, and the guide mechanism 5B is fixed to the right side of the support member 7B.

  The drive mechanism 5A is a mechanism that generates a drive force for moving the movable body 2 up and down. The drive mechanism 5A includes a base portion 50A and a cover portion (not shown). The base portion 50A is a cover body that covers a mechanism disposed in a space between the base portion 50A and a cover portion (not shown) from the rear side. The cover portion corresponds to the cover portion 40B of the moving mechanism 4, and the front side It is a cover body that covers from. The motor 53A is a stepping motor, for example, and is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 50A. An output shaft of the motor 53A passes through the base portion 50A and is fixed to a gear 51B disposed in a space between the base portion 50A and the cover portion. The gear 51B meshes with the gear 51A, and the gear 51A meshes with the gear 51C.

  The gear 51C has a missing tooth portion 51a from which a part of the peripheral tooth portion is missing, and has an engaging portion 51b that protrudes in parallel with the rotation axis direction on the side surface. The gear 51C meshes with the rack portion 54a of the movable member 54A. The movable member 54A is supported by the slide rail 54B so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide rail 54B includes a fixed rail 54e, an intermediate rail 54d, and a movable rail 54c, and the movable member 54A is supported by the movable rail 54c.

  The rack portions 54a of the movable member 54A are arranged in the vertical direction, and move in the vertical direction by the rotation of the gear 51C driven by the motor 53A. When the gear 51C rotates counterclockwise, the movable member 54A rises, and when it rotates clockwise, the movable member 54A descends. The movable member 54A supports the left end portion of the movable body 2 via the bracket 54b, and the movable body 2 operates basically in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 51C. When the rack portion 54a and the toothless portion 51a face each other, the drive transmission between the movable member 54A and the gear 51C is interrupted, and the movable member 54A is in a free-falling state. The free fall of the movable member 54A means the free fall of the movable body 2. In this case, the movable body 2 operates without being interlocked with the rotation of the gear 51C. A cushioning material 54f is disposed below the base portion 50A, and defines a lower limit of free fall of the movable member 54A (that is, a lower limit of free fall of the movable body 2), and mitigates an impact during the fall.

  The base portion 50A also supports sensors 53B and 53C that detect the position of the movable body 2. The sensors 53B and 53C are optical sensors (photo interrupters) that detect the detection piece 54g provided on the movable member 54A. The sensor 53B and the sensor 53C are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, the sensor 53B detects whether or not the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position, and the sensor 53C detects that the movable body 1 is at the lower limit position (lowering). It is also detected whether or not it is located.

  The base unit 50 </ b> A also includes a regulation unit 52 that can regulate the operation of the movable body 2. In the present embodiment, the lowering (downward movement) of the movable body 2 can be restricted by the restriction unit 52. Although the lowering of the movable body 2 can be regulated by the motor 53A, in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 52 is provided separately from the motor 53A, so that the motor 53A is de-energized and the movable body 2 is lowered by power saving. It can be regulated.

  The regulation unit 52 includes an actuator 52A as a drive source. In the present embodiment, the actuator 52A is a solenoid, particularly a pull solenoid, which raises the plunger 52a when energized (excited state). The plunger 52a is provided with a return spring 52D that constantly biases the plunger 52a downward.

  The restriction unit 52 also includes a restriction member 52C. The restricting member 52C is rotatably supported by the base portion 50 and the cover portion via a shaft 52c, and includes a restricting portion 52d that can engage with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. An operation member 52B connected to a restriction member 52C via a pin 52b is attached to the lower end portion of the plunger 52a. The pin 52b is loosely fitted to the regulating member 52C. When the operation member 52B moves up and down by the vertical movement of the plunger 52a, the regulating member 52c rotates around the shaft 52c.

  When the actuator 52A is not energized (non-excited state), the restricting member 52C is positioned at the restricting position by the urging of the return spring 52D, and the restricting portion 52d of the restricting member 52C is engaged with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. Is possible.

  When the gear 51C rotates clockwise, the rotation of the gear 51C is restricted by the engagement of the restricting part 52d and the engaging part 51b, and the lowering of the movable body 2 can be restricted at the initial position. That is, the movable body 2 can be maintained at the initial position without energizing the motor 53A.

  When the gear 51C rotates counterclockwise, the engaging portion 51b comes into contact with the side portion of the restricting member 52C, the restricting member 52C rotates and is located at the non-restricted position (release position), and the counterclockwise direction of the gear 51C. Does not regulate rotation around. Therefore, when the motor 53A is driven to raise the movable body 2 from the initial position, the operation of the movable body 2 is not restricted by the restriction unit 52.

  When the restricting member 52C is located at the restricting position, when the actuator 52A is energized (excited), the plunger 52a is pulled up and the restricting member 52C rotates, so that the engagement portion 51b and the restricting portion 52d are moved. The engagement is released. Therefore, the movable body 2 can be lowered by rotating the gear 51C clockwise by driving the motor 53A.

  The operation member 52B is provided with an operation part 52e protruding to the back side. The operation portion 52e is disposed so as to be operable from the back portion of the base portion 50A through the opening 50a formed in the base portion 50A. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can manually move the operation portion 42e in the vertical direction during maintenance or inspection, and thereby the regulating member 52C can be moved to the non-regulating position.

  The lowering of the movable body 2 can be selected from the lowering by driving the motor 53A and the free fall using the missing tooth portion 51a. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 2 is positioned at the maximum ascending position where the movable body 2 is lifted by a certain amount from the initial position, the positional relationship in which the missing tooth portion 51a and the rack portion 54a face each other, and the movable body 2 is free. Fall.

  Next, the guide mechanism 5B will be described. The guide mechanism 5B is a mechanism that supports the right end portion of the movable body 2 and follows the drive mechanism 5A to guide the vertical movement of the movable body 2.

  The drive mechanism 5B includes a base portion 55A and a cover portion (not shown). The base portion 55A is a cover body that covers the mechanism disposed in the space between the base portion 55A and the cover portion from the rear side, and the cover portion is a cover body that covers from the front side.

  In the base portion 55A, two grooves 55b that support the shaft 56B are formed apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the shaft 56B is arranged with its axial direction as the vertical direction. The base portion 55A is also formed with a recess 55a that forms a moving space for the movable member 56A. In addition, the groove | channel and recessed part similar to the groove | channel 55b and the recessed part 55a are formed also in the cover part.

  The movable member 56A includes a base portion 56a and a cover portion 56b, and two sets of roller pairs 56d are rotatably supported in the internal space. The roller pair 56d is disposed so as to sandwich the shaft 56B, and the movable member 56A slides in the vertical direction by the guide of the shaft 56B.

  The movable member 56A supports the right end portion of the movable body 2 via a bracket 56c, and the movable member 56A moves following the operation of the movable body 2 by the drive mechanism 5A. A buffer material 56e is disposed at the lower end of the recess 55a, and defines the lower limit of free fall of the movable member 56A (that is, the lower limit of free fall of the movable body 2), and the impact at the time of dropping is reduced.

<Movable body 2>
The movable body 2 is a deformable movable object unit whose outer shape is deformed. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the movable body 2 is a deployable movable object unit in which the movable portion changes from the housed state to the unfolded state. The movable body 2 includes a cover portion 20A, a base portion 20B, and a pair of movable portions 23. The base portion 20B is a member extending in the left-right direction, and the drive mechanism 5A is connected to the left end portion thereof, and the guide mechanism 5B is connected to the right end portion thereof.

  The pair of movable parts 23 are provided so as to be displaceable with respect to the base part 20B. In the case of the present embodiment, the pair of movable parts 23 are rotated and the pair of movable parts 23 are deployed and stored. The unfolding operation and the storing operation are possible.

  The base portion 20B is a cover body that covers a mechanism disposed in the space between the base portion 20B and the cover portion 20A from the front side, and the cover portion 20A is a cover body that covers the rear side. The base portion 20B has a circular opening formed at the center thereof, and the rotating member 21A is rotatably supported by the opening. An opening concentric with the opening of the base 20B is formed in the cover 20A, and the rotary connector 25A is disposed in this opening. The rotary connector 25A is fixed to the back portion of the cover portion 20A by an attachment member 25B, and constitutes a slip ring that supplies control signals and electric power to the electrical components supported by the rotary member 21A via the harness 25C. The center of the rotating member of the rotating connector 25A is defined by the shaft 24e.

  The movable body 2 includes a drive mechanism 24 that can execute the rotation operation of the pair of movable portions 23. The drive mechanism 24 is a gear mechanism that includes a motor 24a as a drive source. The motor 24a is, for example, a stepping motor. The motor 24a is fixed to the back part of the cover part 20A, and its output shaft passes through the cover part 20A and is fixed to the gear 24b in the space between the cover part 20A and the base part 20B. Gears 24c and 24d are disposed between the cover portion 20A and the base portion 20B. The gear 24b meshes with the gear 24d, and the gear 24d meshes with the gear 24c.

  A tooth portion 21a is formed over the entire circumference of the rotating member 21A, and the hub 21a meshes with the gear 24c. With the above configuration, when the motor 24a is driven, the rotating member 21A can be rotated.

  The sensor unit 27 includes a sensor for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 21A and a substrate on which the sensor is mounted, and is supported by the base portion 20B. The sensor unit 27 includes, for example, an optical sensor such as a photo interrupter that detects the detection piece 21b provided on the rotating member 21A, and detects whether or not the rotating member 21A is located at the initial position. The relay substrate 29 is a substrate that relays various wirings and is supported by the base portion 20B.

  A base portion 21B is fixed to the rotating member 21A, and the base portion 21B rotates integrally with the rotating member 21A. A drive mechanism 26 for deploying and storing the pair of movable parts 23 is disposed on the base part 21B. The drive mechanism 26 is a gear mechanism including a motor 26a as a drive source. The motor 26a is, for example, a stepping motor. The motor 26a is fixed at the back portion of the base portion 21B, and its output shaft passes through the base portion 21B and a gear 26b is fixed at the front side of the base portion 21B.

  A rotating member 22A is rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 21B. The rotating member 22A includes a cylindrical bulging portion 22b bulging rearward at the center thereof, and the bulging portion 22b enters a circular concave portion 21e formed on the front side of the base portion 21B. . A tooth portion (not shown) is formed on the peripheral surface of the bulging portion 22b, and the gear 26b meshes with the tooth portion.

  A shaft portion 22a protruding rearward is formed at the center of the bulging portion 22b, and the shaft portion 22a is rotatably supported by a shaft hole 21f provided in the center portion of the base portion 21B. The shaft portion 22a and the shaft hole 21f are located coaxially with the rotation center of the rotating member 21A. By driving the motor 26a, the rotating member 22A rotates about the shaft portion 22a through the gear 26b and the teeth of the bulging portion 22b.

  A shaft 24e is fixed to the center of the shaft portion 22a, and a stopper 28B is fixed to the shaft 24e. The stopper 28B is a retaining member that prevents the base portion 21B from being sandwiched between the stopper 28B and the rotation member 22A, and thereby the rotation member 22A is rotatably fixed to the base portion 21B.

  In addition to the motor 26a and the stopper 28B, a sensor 28A is disposed in the space between the rotating member 21A and the base portion 21B. The sensor 28A is a sensor that detects the rotational position of the rotating member 22A. The sensor 28A may be any sensor. In the case of the present embodiment, the sensor 28A is an optical sensor (photo interrupter) that detects the detection piece 28a provided on the stopper 28B, and is the rotation member 22A positioned at the initial position? Detect whether or not.

  The base portion 21B has a pair of arm portions extending opposite to the center thereof, and a connecting hole 21c is formed at an end portion of each arm portion. One end of a link 21D is rotatably connected to the connection hole 21c via a bush 21d.

  The rotating member 22A has a pair of shaft support portions 22c at positions symmetrical with respect to the center thereof. A shaft support member 22D is attached to the shaft support portion 22c, and the shaft support member 22D is fixed to the movable portion 23, whereby the movable portion 23 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 22A.

  The rotating member 22A is also formed with a pair of stopper portions 22d at positions symmetrical with respect to the center thereof. The stopper portion 22d is a portion that abuts on the link 21D and restricts the displacement when the link 21D is positioned to a predetermined position, and defines the maximum deployment position of the movable portion 23.

A substrate 22B is supported on the front side of the rotating member 22A. A plurality of light emitting elements L1 to L5 (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 22B. In the present embodiment, the light emitting elements L1 to L5 are arranged in a cross shape. The substrate 22B is covered with a cover body 22C. The cover body 22C is a light-transmitting member, but may partially have a non-transmissive portion. The substrate 22B and the cover body 22C are formed with notches that avoid interference with the shaft support member 22D.

  The movable part 23 is a blade-shaped arm member as a whole, and is a laminated body of a base part 23a, a substrate 23b, a lens member 23d, and a cover body 23e. The base portion 23a is provided with a fixed portion 23f to which the shaft support member 22D is fixed, and a shaft support portion 23g on which the other end portion of the link 21D is rotatably supported. A plurality of light emitting elements 23c (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 23b. The lens member 23d covers the substrate 23b and covers the cover body 23e. The lens member 23d and the cover body 23e are translucent members, but may have a non-transmissive portion in part.

  With the above configuration, the rotation member 21A is rotated by the drive of the motor 24a, whereby the base portion 21B, the rotation member 22A, the pair of movable portions 23, and the like rotate integrally. Then, the rotation member 22A rotates (rotates) with respect to the base portion 21B by the rotation of the motor 26a. At this time, the movable portion 23 is pivotally supported with respect to the rotating member 22A so as to be rotatable with respect to the fixed portion 23f, and is connected to the base portion 21B via a link 21d. For this reason, the movable portion 23 performs a rotation operation with the fixed portion 23f as a rotation center, thereby performing a deployment operation and a storage operation.

<Movement mechanism 6 and movable body 3>
The moving mechanism 6 and the movable body 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism 6 and the movable body 3. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 3.

<Moving mechanism 6>
The moving mechanism 6 includes a base portion 60A. A movable member 60B is supported on the base portion 60A via a slide rail 63. The movable member 60B is supported by a slide rail 63 extending in the vertical direction so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide rail 63 includes a fixed rail 63c fixed to the base portion 60A, an intermediate rail 63b slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the fixed rail 63c, and a movable rail 63a slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the intermediate rail 63b. The movable member 60B is supported by the movable rail 63a. The base portion 30 of the movable body 3 is fixed to the movable member 60B.

  One end portion of the arm member 61 is rotatably supported on the left end portion of the base portion 60A via a shaft 61a, and one end portion of the arm member 62 is rotated on the right end portion of the base portion 60A via a shaft 62a. It is supported movably. Grooves 30a and 30b extending in the left-right direction are formed in the lower part of the base part 30, and the other end of the arm member 62 is rotatably connected to the groove 30b via a slide member 62b. The other end of the arm member 61 is rotatably connected via the slide member 61b.

  The moving mechanism 6 includes a drive mechanism 64 that rotates the arm member 61. The drive mechanism 64 is a gear mechanism using a motor 64b as a drive source, and the motor 64b is, for example, a stepping motor. The drive mechanism 64 includes a base portion 64a supported by the base portion 65A, and the motor 64b is supported on the front side of the base portion 64a. A gear cover 64f is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 64a, and gears 64d and 64e are rotatably supported in a space between the base portion 64a and the gear cover 64f. The output shaft of the motor 64b passes through the base portion 64a, and the gear 64c is fixed in the space between the base portion 64a and the gear cover 64f. The gear 64c meshes with the gear 64d, and the gear 64d meshes with the gear 64e. The arm member 61 is formed with a tooth portion 61d that meshes with the gear 64e, and the arm member 61 is rotated by driving the motor 64b.

  The base member 30 is urged in the vertical direction by the rotation of the arm member 61, and the movable body 3 is moved up and down by the arm member 62 being driven and rotated. As the arm members 61 and 62 rotate, the slide members 61b and 62b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the grooves 30b and 30a, and the rotation of the arm members 61 and 62 is converted into a lifting motion of the movable body 3.

  A harness cover 61c is attached to the back of the arm member 61, and a harness (not shown) is arranged in the space between the arm member 61 and the harness cover 61c. An arm cover 62 b is disposed on the front side of the arm member 62.

  A sensor 65 that detects the position of the arm member 61 is supported on the gear cover 64f. Although any sensor may be sufficient as the sensor 65, in the case of this embodiment, it is an optical sensor (photo interrupter) which detects the detection piece 61e formed in the arm member 61. FIG. The sensor 65 detects whether or not the arm member 61 is located at the initial position.

  A cover member 68 that protects the attachment portion of the shaft 61a, a relay board 67, and an urging unit 66 are disposed on the back of the base portion 60A.

  The urging unit 66 is a unit that urges the arm member 62 in a predetermined direction by using the spring 66E as a drive source. In this embodiment, when the movable body 3 is raised, the spring 66E is extended and the movable body 3 is lowered. It is configured to exert a biasing force in the direction. Specifically, the urging unit 66 includes a base portion 66A that is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 60A. A vertical groove 66a is formed in the base portion 66A, and a movable member 66d is attached to the groove 66a to guide the movement of the movable member 66d in the vertical direction. A gear 66B is rotatably supported on the base portion 66A via a shaft 62a.

  The gear 66B is connected to the arm member 62 via the shaft 62a, and the gear 66B also rotates when the arm member 62 rotates. A gear 66C is rotatably supported on the base portion 66A via a shaft 66c. The gear 66C meshes with the gear 66B, and meshes with a rack portion 66d formed on the movable member 66D. The spring 66E connects the movable member 66D and the base portion 60A, and always urges the movable member 66D downward. When the movable body 3 is raised, the arm member 62 is rotated, whereby the movable member 66D is raised through the rotation of the gear 66B, the spring 66E is extended, and the urging force is increased.

<Movable body 3>
The movable body 3 has a circular shape as a whole, and is a rotary display unit including a rotatable display device 34. In particular, the movable body 3 is a versatile movable object unit constituting a versatile writer. The display device 34 is a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements (here, LEDs, details will be described later) are mounted, and is configured to be rotatable by a drive mechanism using a motor 35 as a drive source.

  The motor 35 is a stepping motor, for example, and is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 30. An output shaft of the motor 35 passes through the base portion 30, and a gear 35 a is fixed on the front side of the base portion 30. A gear 35b is fixed to the back of the display device 34 coaxially with the rotation center thereof, and the gear 35a meshes with the gear 35b.

  A shaft 36 is fixed to the shaft center of the gear 35b. The shaft 36 is rotatably supported by the rotary connector unit 37. The rotary connector unit 37 is fixed to the base portion 30 and includes a slip ring that supplies a control signal and power to a light emitting element mounted on the display device 34, and a sensor that detects a rotational position of the display device 34.

  A display device 32 is disposed on the front side of the base portion 30. Unlike the display device 34, the display device 32 is a device fixed to the base portion 30, and is a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements (here, LEDs, details will be described later) are mounted. The cover body 33 is a light-transmitting member and is disposed so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the display device 32. The plurality of light emitting elements 32a are located on the outer peripheral portion of the display device 32. 33 is not covered.

  The cover body 31 is fixed to the front side of the base portion 30 and covers the display devices 32 and 34. The cover body 31 is a member having translucency.

  69A is a front view of the movable body 3, and FIG. 69B is a front view of the movable body 3 with the cover body 31 removed. FIG. 69C is a front view of the movable body 3 that has passed through the cover body 31.

  The outer shape of the cover body 31 is circular, and its front wall has a shape in which twelve circular portions 31a are formed around a central circular portion 31b. Unevenness is continuously formed in the circumferential direction on the peripheral wall of the cover body 31.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the circular portion 31b is entirely transparent, and the configuration behind the circular portion 31b is visible. A part of the circular portion 31a is opaque. In the case of the present embodiment, characters I to XII are formed in each circular portion 31a, and the character portions are colored and thus opaque. Depending on the characters I to XII, the cover 31 may be visible on the clock face. Characters can be formed by sticking a sticker or painting.

  Each circular portion 31a is provided with concentric multiple circular grooves, which also reduce the permeability of the circular portion 31a and make it difficult to see behind it.

  The display device 32 includes twelve light emitting elements L14. Each light emitting element L14 is arranged corresponding to the circular part 31a, and one light emitting element L14 is arranged behind the center of one circular part 31a. Since the display device 32 is fixed to the base portion 30, the relative position between each light emitting element L14 and the base portion 30 or the cover body 31 does not change, and each light emitting element L14 is indicated by characters I to XII or narrow grooves. It is difficult to see through the cover body 31. When the light emitting element L14 emits light, light may be diffused by the narrow groove of the circular portion 31a and the whole circular portion 31a may appear to emit light, and the characters I to XII can be visually emphasized. There is a case.

  The display device 34 includes a light emitting element L11 arranged at a position serving as the rotation center, and a plurality of light emitting element arrays LA arranged radially from the rotation center. In the present embodiment, the number of light emitting element arrays LA is 6, and they are arranged at an equal pitch in the circumferential direction. Each light emitting element row LA is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements L12 and a light emitting element L13 located on the outermost periphery, and these are arranged in a straight line.

  By rotating the display device 34, the light emitting element array LA can change the relative position with respect to the base portion 30 and the cover body 31. On the other hand, since the light emitting element L11 is located at the center of rotation, it is impossible to change the relative position with respect to the base portion 30, the cover body 31, or the light emitting element L14.

  As described above, by mixing the light emitting elements L12 and L13 whose relative positions change with respect to the base 30 and the cover body 31 and the light emitting elements L11 and L14 whose relative positions do not change, various light emitting effects may be possible. is there. In the case of the present embodiment, the light emitting element L11, the light emitting element array LA, and the light emitting element L12 are arranged in the same straight line depending on the rotation angle of the display device 34 as shown in FIG. May be possible. In this case, the light emitting element L13 is located at a position overlapping the circular portion 31a in the depth direction. In other words, the light emitting element L13 may or may not overlap with the circular portion 31a due to the rotation of the display device 34. Since the circular part 31a is less permeable than the circular part 31b, the appearance of light emission of the light emitting element L13 may change before and after passing through the position overlapping the circular part 31a, and various light emission effects are possible. It may become. On the contrary, since the light emitting elements L11 and L12 always overlap with the circular portion 31b in the depth direction, the light emitting elements L11 and L12 may be easily visible at all times through the cover body 31, and the display contents of the light emitting elements L11 and L12 may be easily visible to the player. There is.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (d), the light emitting elements L11 are arranged on the rotation center axis AX of the display device 34, and the light emitting element arrays LA are arranged in the radial direction of the rotation center axis AX. However, other configurations can be employed. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (e), the light emitting element array LA may be arranged in parallel with the rotation center axis AX. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (f), the light emitting elements L11 may be arranged on the rotation center axis AX, and the light emitting element rows LA may be arranged in a radial manner inclined from the radial direction. Further, in this embodiment, the rotation center axis AX is a horizontal axis and a depth axis, but is not limited thereto, and may be, for example, a vertical axis as shown in FIG. An axis in a direction inclined from the direction may be used.

<Example of production operation>
Operation examples of the movable bodies 1 to 3 will be described in order.

<Movable body 1>
FIG. 61 exemplifies the deformation operation of the movable body 1, and shows an operation example of the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 together with main mechanisms in the front view and the rear view of the movable body 1. 61 (a) shows the initial positions of the movable parts 11, 12, and 14, and FIG. 61 (c) shows the position (moving position) after the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are moved. FIG. 61 (b) shows an intermediate position between the initial position and the moving position. The movable parts 11, 12 and 14 can be deformed from the initial position through the intermediate position to the moving position, and can be returned from the moving position through the intermediate position to the initial position. In addition, when the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are located in the initial position, the sensor 18 is configured to detect the detection piece 14d, and for control purposes, the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are located in the initial position. It is recognized from the detection result of the sensor 18 or not.

  In the case of this embodiment, the movable part 11 and the movable part 14 perform different operations. Further, the movable unit 12 and the movable unit 14 perform different operations. The movable part 11 is a rotational movement about the rotational axis 10a 'that moves along the curved track OR1. The movable part 12 moves along the curved track OR2 and is a rotational movement about the rotational axis 10b 'and is symmetric with respect to the movable part 11. The movable part 14 is a translational movement that moves along the linear track OR3. Thus, the movable part 14 and the movable parts 11 and 12 have the difference of operation | movement called translation operation | movement and rotation operation | movement. Providing movable parts with different operations in this way may improve the production effect. In particular, there may be a case where the production effect can be improved by performing different operations of the movable parts provided in the same movable body 1.

  In the present embodiment, the movable portions 11 and 12 perform only the rotation operation, but may be configured to perform the rotation operation and the translation operation along the track including the linear track. The operation and the translation operation may be performed sequentially or may be performed in parallel. Similarly, the movable portion 14 performs only the translation operation, but may be configured to perform the translation operation and the rotation operation along the trajectory including the curved trajectory. In this case, the rotation operation and the translation operation are The operations may be performed sequentially or may be performed in parallel.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are in a posture extending in the left-right direction at the initial position, while the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are triangular in the moving position. In some cases, the player may be surprised. Further, at the intermediate position, the movable parts 11 and 12 may appear to spread wings, and at the movement position, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 may appear as a pyramid. May be able to give.

  Furthermore, in the course of the operation, the movable parts 11 and 12 and the movable part 14 partially overlap in the depth direction as seen at the intermediate position, so that a sense of depth can be given to the player and the effect of the production is enhanced. There are cases where it is possible. Furthermore, at the moving position, the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are in a posture that does not overlap each other in the depth direction, and the end portions of the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are in a posture that is close to each other. In some cases, the player may be able to impress the accuracy of the operation, and the production effect may be enhanced. By arranging the movable parts 11 and 12 and the movable part 14 at positions shifted in the depth direction, it may be easy to secure a movable space for each movable body.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 operate in conjunction with each other, and the operation period from the initial position to the movement position or from the movement position to the initial position is the same period. For this reason, the player may be given a sense of unity in the operation of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14. The operation periods of the movable parts may or may not overlap with each other. FIG. 73 shows an example of the timing of the operation period. The control of the operation period can be realized mechanically or by providing an individual drive source in each movable part to enable independent operation.

  In FIG. 73, the first operation is, for example, the operation of the movable portion 11, the second operation is, for example, the operation of the movable portion 12, and the third operation is, for example, the operation of the movable portion 14, and t Indicates the passage of time.

  FIG. 73 (a) is an example which has already been described, and is an example in which the operation periods of the three movable parts are the same. FIG. 73B is an example in which the operation periods of the two movable parts are the same, and the operation periods of the remaining one movable part are different. FIG. 73C shows an example in which the operation periods of the three movable parts are different from each other. The example of FIG. 73D is an example in which the operation periods of the first operation and the second operation partially overlap, and the operation periods of the second operation and the third operation partially overlap. In these operations, the length of the operation period of the movable part may be the same or different, and FIG. 74 (e) shows an example in which the operation periods of the three movable parts are different from each other. Show.

  Next, an operation example including the moving operation of the movable body 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. 62 and 63 are diagrams showing an operation example of the movable body 1.

  FIG. 62A illustrates the case where the movable body 1 is in the initial position. Note that the fact that the movable body 1 is located at the initial position is detected by the sensor 43B as described above.

  62 (b) to 62 (f) show the moving position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 4 and the manner of the movable body 1 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 62B shows a case where the movable body 1 is located at the raised position. The ascending position is a position slightly above the initial position, and is a position where the display region R1 and the movable body 1 do not overlap. The initial position is also a position where the display region R1 and the movable body 1 do not overlap. When the movable body 1 is in the initial position or the raised position and the movable body 2 is in the initial position described later, the movable body 2 is located behind the movable body 1 as shown in FIG. 1 makes it difficult to see.

  When the movable body 1 is raised beyond the raised position, the rack portion 44a and the toothless portion 41a face each other, and the movable body 1 falls freely. FIG. 62D shows a case where the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, and FIG. 62C shows a case where the movable body 1 is located at an intermediate position between the raised position and the lowered position. When the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, as described above, the case of free fall and the case of control drop by driving the motor 43A can be selected, and the effect of production is enhanced by using two drops separately. There are cases where it is possible. Note that the fact that the movable body 1 is in the lowered position is detected by the sensor 43C as described above.

  In the case of this embodiment, the movable body 1 and the movable body 3 are in a positional relationship that interferes in the depth direction. Therefore, when the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, the movable body 3 is positioned at an initial position described later so as not to be raised. In other words, when the movable body 3 is raised, the movable body 1 is not positioned at the lowered position. Alternatively, the operation restriction of the movable body 1 may be performed by contact with the movable body 3.

  At the intermediate position, the movable body 1 partially overlaps the display region R1, and the movable body 2 at the initial position starts to be exposed. In the lowered position, the movable body 1 generally overlaps in the center of the display area R1, and the player's attention may be attracted to the movable body 1, and the display contents of the display area R1 may be displayed by the movable body 1. May be partially hidden. In the lowered position, the movable body 2 in the initial position is exposed as a whole.

  62 (e) shows a mode in which the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position and the movable portions 11, 12, and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved to the intermediate position (FIG. 61 (b)). (F) shows a mode in which the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position and the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved to the movement position (FIG. 61 (c)). The operations of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 can be performed regardless of the position of the movable body 1. However, when the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, the movable body 1 can be operated by executing these operations. May be noticeable.

  Since the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 and the structure 16 are shifted in the depth direction, the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 and the structure 16 do not interfere with each other during operation and are partially in the depth direction. In addition, the overlapping range varies depending on the progress of the operation. Thereby, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 may be able to be operated without reducing the visibility of the structure 16. In addition, the overlapping range of the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 and the display region R1 is different from the overlapping range depending on the progress of the operation. Thereby, in the display area R1, the range in which the player can see (or the range to hide) changes, and the effect can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 63A and 63B show an example of restriction release by the restriction unit 42. The lowering of the movable body 1 is restricted by the restriction of the restriction unit 42 at the initial position. FIG. 63A shows a state in which the restriction is released at the initial position, and shows a state in which the restricting member 42C is rotated and is not engaged with the engaging portion 41b of the gear 41C. The gear 41C can be rotated clockwise, and FIG. 63 (b) shows a state where the gear 41C is rotated until the engaging portion 41b is located at the 0 o'clock position of the timepiece. Thereby, the movable body 1 is slightly lowered from the initial position. An effect of vibrating the movable body 1 up and down is possible by repeating a small amount of clockwise and counterclockwise rotation around the position of the gear 41C in FIG. 63 (b). 63 (c) to 63 (e) show both the moving position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 4 and the mode of the movable body 1 in the game area 124 at that time.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows the state of the rotational position where the gear 41C is located at the 0 o'clock position of the timepiece, as in FIG. 63 (b). Although the movable body 1 and the display area R1 do not overlap, they are closer to each other when the lower end of the structure 16 is in contact with the upper side of the display area R1 in front view. FIG. 63 (d) shows the state of the rotational position where the gear 41C is rotated clockwise and the engaging portion 41b is located at the 1 o'clock position of the timepiece. The movable body 1 is slightly lowered and overlaps the display area R1. FIG. 63 (e) shows a rotational position where the gear 41C is rotated counterclockwise and its engaging portion 41b is located at the 11 o'clock position. The movable body 1 is slightly raised and is located at a position that does not overlap the display area R1 again. When the engaging portion 41b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the timepiece, the engaging portion 41b is in contact with the side portion SD of the restricting member 42C and rotates the restricting member 42C, but is more than the restricting portion 42d. It is not located on the left side, and therefore is not engaged with the restricting portion 42d. Therefore, when the gear 41C is repeatedly rotated so that the engaging portion 41b reciprocates between the 11:00 position and the 1 o'clock position of the timepiece, it is not necessary to perform the restriction release operation of the restriction unit 42, and Although the vibration operation can be performed, the restriction of the restriction unit 42 may be released.

<Movable body 2>
FIG. 64 illustrates the unfolding operation of the movable body 2, and shows an example of the operation of the movable body 2 together with the main configuration of the movable body 2 through the movable portion 23. In order to facilitate understanding, the rotating member 21A is not rotated and only the rotating operation of the rotating member 22A is shown, but the entire rotating operation by the rotation of the rotating member 21A is also possible. .

  State A shows the initial position where the pair of movable parts 23 is in the initial state (stored state), and state D shows the maximum deployment position where the pair of movable parts 23 is in the deployed state. C indicates an intermediate position between the initial position and the maximum deployment position. The pair of movable parts 23 can be deformed from the initial position via the intermediate position to the maximum deployed position, and can be returned from the maximum deployed position via the intermediate position to the initial position. In addition, when the pair of movable parts 23 is located at the initial position, the sensor 28A is configured to detect the detection piece 28a, and whether the pair of movable parts 23 is located at the initial position for control. Is recognized from the detection result of the sensor 23A.

  When in the initial position, the pair of movable parts 23 are in a state where their side surfaces are close to each other and the light emitting elements L1 to L5 behind them overlap with any one of the pair of movable parts 23 in the depth direction. In this state, the light emitting elements L1 to L5 overlap the substrate 23b, the lens 23d, and the cover body 23e. In particular, when the substrate 23b does not have translucency, the presence of the light emitting elements L1 to L5 is difficult to visually recognize. However, when the light emitting elements L1 to L5 are driven, the light leaks from the surroundings of the pair of movable parts 23 and may be visible, which may enhance the effect.

  When the rotation member 22A is rotated from the state A, the position of the shaft support member 22D that connects the rotation member 22A and the movable portion 23 moves, while the connection point (bush 21d between the link 21D and the rotation member 21A). ) Position does not change. Therefore, the movable portion 23 develops from state B to state D while the movable range is restricted by the link 21D.

  As the state B to the state D are developed, the pair of movable parts 23 shifts to an open state in which the side surfaces of the pair of movable parts 23 begin to separate from each other. Here, the light emitting element L3 is disposed at the rotation center of the rotation member 22A. The light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 are disposed on the opposite side to the light emitting element L3, and the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are disposed on the opposite side to the light emitting element L3. The line connecting the light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 and the line connecting the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are orthogonal to each other, and the light emitting element L3 is located at the intersection.

  In each of the states B to D, the light emitting element L3 disposed at the rotation center of the rotation member 22A does not overlap in the depth direction with any of the pair of movable parts 23 and is in an exposed state. Therefore, the player may easily recognize the light emission of the light emitting element L3. In each of the states B to D, the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are not overlapped with each other in the depth direction and are exposed. Therefore, the player may easily recognize the light emission of the light emitting elements L4 and L5.

  On the other hand, in the state B and the state C, the light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 do not overlap with each other in the depth direction and are in an exposed state, but in the state D, the pair of movable parts are exposed. It overlaps with either of 23 in the depth direction. In this state, the light emitting elements L1 and L2 overlap the substrate 23b, the lens 23d, and the cover body 23e. In particular, when the substrate 23b does not have translucency, the presence of the light emitting elements L1 and L2 is difficult to visually recognize. However, when the light emitting elements L1 and L2 are driven, the light leaks from the surroundings of the pair of movable parts 23 and may be visible, which may enhance the effect.

  Thus, in this embodiment, as the light emitting elements L1 and L2 change from state A to state D, the state changes such that it overlaps with the movable part 23 → does not overlap with the movable part 23 → overlaps with the movable part 23. To do. Therefore, the light appearance of the light emitting elements L1 and L2 may change during the transition from the state A to the state D (or the reverse transition), and the presentation effect may be enhanced.

  Next, the distances A to D are distances from the rotation center of the rotation member 22A in the states A to D to the farthest position of the movable portion 23, and the relationship of distance A <distance B <distance C <distance D is satisfied. is there. When the movable body 2 is deployed, it may interfere with surrounding structures within a distance D from the rotation center of the rotation member 22A, and the movable body 2 and the movable body 3 interfere in the depth direction. If they are in a positional relationship and close to each other, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, when the movable body 2 is deployed, interference can be avoided by rotating the rotating member 21A and moving the farthest position of the movable portion 23. The rotation center of the rotation member 21A is coaxial with the rotation center of the rotation member 22A.

  For example, when there is a configuration that interferes with the left and right, the movable portion 23 may be rotated and deployed so that the farthest position of the movable portion 23 is positioned up and down. On the other hand, if there is a configuration that interferes vertically, the movable portion 23 may be rotated and deployed so that the farthest position of the movable portion 23 is located on the left and right. When the movable portion 23 is in the unfolded state and the rotating member 21A is further rotated to rotate the pair of movable portions 23 as a whole, if there is a configuration that interferes with the surroundings, depending on the rotational position, the state B is avoided. It may be rotated while temporarily shifting to the state C. For example, if interference occurs at a rotation angle of 0 to 10 degrees, state B or state C is set in the range of 0 to 10 degrees of rotation angle, and state D is set in the range of 10 to 360 degrees. Can do.

  Next, an operation example including the moving operation of the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are diagrams showing an operation example of the movable body 2. The movable body 2 can be moved in the same manner as the movable body 1.

  FIG. 66A illustrates a case where the movable body 2 is in the initial position (the movable portion 23 is the initial position). Note that the fact that the movable body 2 is located at the initial position is detected by the sensor 53B as described above.

  66 (b) to 66 (f) show the moving position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 5 and the manner of the movable body 2 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 66B shows a case where the movable body 2 is located at the raised position. The ascending position is a position slightly above the initial position, and is a position where the display region R1 and the movable body 2 do not overlap. The initial position is also a position where the display region R1 and the movable body 2 do not overlap. When the movable body 2 is at the initial position or the raised position and the movable body 1 is at the initial position, the movable body 2 is positioned behind the movable body 1 as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 65 (b). However, it is difficult to visually recognize because it is covered with the movable body 1.

  When the movable body 2 is raised beyond the raised position, the rack portion 54a and the toothless portion 51a face each other, and the movable body 2 falls freely. FIG. 65D shows the case where the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, and FIG. 65C shows the case where the movable body 2 is located at an intermediate position between the raised position and the lowered position. When the movable body 2 is positioned at the lowered position, as described above, the case of free fall and the case of control drop by driving the motor 53A can be selected, and the effect of production is enhanced by using two drops separately. There are cases where it is possible. In the case of this embodiment, the movable body 2 and the movable body 3 are in a positional relationship that interferes in the depth direction. Therefore, when the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position, the movable body 3 is positioned at an initial position, which will be described later, and is not raised. In other words, when the movable body 3 is raised, the movable body 2 is not positioned at the lowered position. Alternatively, the operation restriction of the movable body 2 may be performed by contact with the movable body 3.

  At the intermediate position, the movable body 2 partially overlaps the display area R1. In the lowered position, the movable body 2 generally overlaps from the center to the top of the display area R1, and the player's attention may be attracted to the movable body 2, and the movable body 2 may cause the display area R1 to be attracted. The display content of may be partially hidden.

  FIG. 65 (e) shows a mode in which the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position and the movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is moved to the intermediate position (state C in FIG. 64). The mode in which the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position and the movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is moved to the unfolded state (state D in FIG. 64) is shown. The movable body 2 can further rotate the movable portion 23, and the deploying / housing operation of the movable portion 23 and the rotation operation of the entire pair of movable portions 23 can be performed as long as there is no interference with the surroundings. Regardless, it can be executed, but when the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position, the movable body 2 may be made conspicuous by executing these operations.

  66 (f) and 66 (g) show the movable portion 23 in the housed state and the entire rotational position thereof is different. In the embodiment of FIG. 66 (f) and the embodiment of FIG. 66 (g). There is a 45 degree rotation position difference.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 63 (f) and 63 (g), there may be a case where the stage effect can be enhanced by moving the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the lowered position and operating each movable portion.

  66 (a) and 66 (b) show an example of restriction release by the restriction unit 52. FIG. The lowering of the movable body 2 is restricted by the restriction of the restriction unit 52 at the initial position. FIG. 66A shows a state in which the restriction is released at the initial position, and shows a state in which the restricting member 52C is rotated and is not engaged with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. The gear 51C can be rotated clockwise, and FIG. 66 (b) shows a state in which the gear 51C is rotated until the engaging portion 51b is located at the 0 o'clock position. Thereby, the movable body 2 is slightly lowered from the initial position. An effect of vibrating the movable body 2 up and down is possible by repeating a small amount of clockwise and counterclockwise rotation around the position of the gear 51C in FIG. 66 (b). 66 (c) to 66 (e) show the position of the movable body 2 raised and lowered by the moving mechanism 5 and the mode of the movable body 2 in the game area 124 at that time. Here, although the movable part 23 of the movable body 2 is in the housed state, it may be vibrated as an unfolded state or an intermediate state.

  FIG. 66 (c) shows the state of the rotational position where the gear 51C is located at the 0 o'clock position of the timepiece, as in FIG. 66 (b). Although the movable body 2 and the display area R1 do not overlap, they are closer to each other when the lower end of the movable body 2 is in contact with the upper side of the display area R1 in front view. FIG. 66 (d) shows a state where the gear 51C is rotated clockwise and the engaging portion 51b is located at the 1 o'clock position of the timepiece. The movable body 1 is slightly lowered and overlaps the display area R1. FIG. 66 (e) shows a state where the gear 51C is rotated counterclockwise and the engaging portion 51b is located at the 11 o'clock position. The movable body 2 is slightly raised and is located at a position that does not overlap the display region R1 again. When the engaging portion 51b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the timepiece, the engaging portion 51b is in contact with the side portion of the restricting member 52C and rotates the restricting member 52C, but is on the left side of the restricting portion 52d. Therefore, it is not engaged with the restricting portion 52d. Therefore, when the gear 51C is repeatedly rotated so that the engaging portion 51b reciprocates between the 11:00 position and the 1 o'clock position of the timepiece, it is not necessary to perform the restriction release operation of the restriction unit 52, and Although the vibration operation can be performed, the restriction release operation of the restriction unit 52 may be performed.

<Example of combined operation of movable body 1 and movable body 2>
An example of an effect operation in which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are combined will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67A shows a case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are in the initial position and each movable portion is also in the initial position. In this state, as shown by the color coating in the figure, all or part of the light emitting elements 11d, 12d and 16b of the movable body 1 and all or part of the light emitting elements L1 to L5 and 23c of the movable body 2 are You may drive (lighting and blinking). In some cases, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 can make the player feel a sense of unity of the production by making the light emission colors the same. Can make you feel. Although the movable body 2 is hidden behind the movable body 1, the light from the light emitting element may be visible by leaking from the periphery of the movable body 1, or may be partially visible through the movable body 1. is there.

  67 (b) to 67 (n) show an example in which the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position and is operated in the order of deployment state → storage state → overall rotation → deployment state → storage state. ) To return the movable body 2 to the initial position. The movement to the lowered position in FIG. 67 (b) may be a free fall. The movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may emit light continuously or for a predetermined time after the movement to the lowered position in FIG. 67 (b), as in the case of FIG. 67 (a). When the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position, the display device 208 may display the decorative symbols in a different area from the display area R1. The unfolding / storing operation of the movable body 2 may be repeated. The rotating operation of the movable body 2 may be repeated. The unfolding / housing operation of the movable body and the rotation operation may be performed sequentially or in parallel.

  68 (p) to 68 (r) show an example in which the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, and the movable portions 11, 12, and 14 are moved to the moved positions and returned to the initial positions. FIG. 68 (s) Thus, the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position. The movement to the lowered position in FIG. 68 (P) may be a free fall. The movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be caused to emit light continuously or for a predetermined time after the movement to the lowered position in FIG. 68 (p), as in the case of FIG. 67 (a). When the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, the display device 208 may display the decorative symbols in a different area from the display area R1.

  The mode of FIG. 68 (q) may notify that a setting advantageous to the player has been made. 67 (b) to 67 (n) may be used to notify that the player has made advantageous settings. In the case of FIG. 68 (q), In comparison, the player may be notified that a more advantageous setting has been made, and the embodiment of FIG. 68 (q) is a notification that a more advantageous setting has been made to the player. It may be.

<Movable body 3>
An example of the moving operation of the movable body 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the movable body 3.

  FIG. 70A illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is in the initial position. In the present embodiment, the initial position is the lowest position in the vertical movement range of the movable body 3. In addition, when the movable body 3 is located at the initial position, the sensor 65 is configured to detect the detection piece 61e, and it is determined whether the movable body 3 is located at the initial position for control. It is recognized from the detection result.

  FIG. 70C illustrates a case where the movable body 3 is in the raised position, and FIG. 70B illustrates a case where the movable body 3 is in an intermediate position between the initial position and the raised position. The rising position is the highest position in the vertical movement range of the movable body 3 in this embodiment.

  Such up and down movement of the movable body 3 is performed by rotating the arm members 61 and 62 by driving the motor 64b. Further, the lowering operation of the movable body 3 can be performed only by the urging force of the spring 66E without driving the motor 64b. While the movable body 3 moves from the initial position to the raised position or returns from the raised position to the initial position, the slide members 61b and 62b move from the outer end to the inner end to the outer end of the grooves 30b and 30a. Then, the groove 30b, 30a is reciprocated once.

  71A to 71C show the moving position of the movable body 3 and the manner of the movable body 3 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 71A illustrates a case where the movable body 3 is located at the initial position. Most of the movable body 3 is covered with a cover 203 or the like, and only a part of the upper side is exposed. The movable body 3 and the display area R1 do not overlap in the depth direction.

  Even if the display device 32 or the display device 34 performs the display at the initial position, it may not be clearly visible to the player. However, display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be performed, and when the cover 203 is formed of a light-transmitting member, the player can recognize the light emission of the display device 32 or the display device 34. In some cases, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the movable body 3 is hidden by the cover 203. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be a different display from the case where the movable body 3 is positioned at the intermediate position or the raised position, or the same display.

  FIG. 71B illustrates a case where the movable body 3 is located at the intermediate position. More than half of the movable body 3 is exposed from the cover 203. The upper part of the movable body 3 and the display area R1 overlap in the depth direction. Display may be performed by the display device 32 or the display device 34 at the intermediate position. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be a display different from the case where the movable body 3 is located at the initial position or the raised position, or may be the same display.

  FIG. 71 (c) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is located at the raised position. The entire movable body 3 is exposed from the cover 203. Since the outer shape of the movable body 3 is circular, when the movable body 3 comes out from the initial position to the raised position, the movable body 3 may look like sunrise. The movable body 3 generally overlaps the display region R1 in the depth direction. When the movable body 3 is moved to the raised position, the display device 208 may display the decorative symbols in a different area from the display area R1.

  When display is performed by the display device 32 or the display device 34 at the ascending position, the display is easy to see as a whole, and thus there may be a case where it is possible to enhance the effect. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be a different display from the case where the movable body 3 is located at the initial position or the intermediate position, or the same display. When the movable body 3 moves to the raised position, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be positioned at the initial position for the purpose of avoiding interference.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the movable body 3 positioned at the raised position with the cover 31 removed, and shows a state in which the display device 34 is rotating. 72A and 72B, the position of the display device 34 is different by about 30 degrees. The display device 34 can function as a versatile writer and can perform various displays.

<Operation at power-on>
As an initial operation when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the operations of the movable bodies 1 to 3 and the moving mechanisms 4 to 6 may be confirmed. The operation check may be performed in the following order. Failures may be avoided by operating little by little without starting full operation from the beginning, and it may be easy to find anomalies.

1. When the movable body 3 is raised by the moving mechanism 6 and it is detected that the movable body 3 has moved from the initial position, the movable body 3 is returned to the initial position.
2. When the display device 34 is rotated and the sensor in the rotary connector unit 37 detects that the display device 34 has made a full turn, the display device 34 is stopped at the initial position.
3. The movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position by the moving mechanism 4.
4). The movable parts 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved, and when it is detected that they have moved from the initial position, they are returned to the initial position.
5. The movable body 1 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 4.
6). The movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position by the moving mechanism 5.
7). When the movable part 23 of the movable body 2 is moved (deployment operation) and it is detected that the movable part 2 has moved from the initial position, the movable part 23 is returned to the initial position.
8). The movable body 2 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 5.
9. The movable body 3 is moved to the raised position by the moving mechanism 6.
10. The display device 34 is rotated a plurality of times.
11. The movable body 3 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 6.
12 The movable body 1 is raised by the moving mechanism 4 and the movable body 1 is freely dropped.
13. After moving the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 to the moving position, the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position.
14 The movable body 1 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 4.
15. The movable body 2 is raised by the moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2 is freely dropped.
16. After the movable body 2 is unfolded and rotated, it is returned to the initial position.
17. The movable body 2 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 5.
In the case where another movable body is provided, the operation confirmation may be performed in parallel with these operations 1 to 17.

<Summary of Embodiment>
A1. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A plurality of driving means (for example, 15a, 43A);
A first movable part (e.g. 14);
A second movable part (e.g. 11 or 12);
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of driving means (hereinafter referred to as “first driving means” (for example, 15a) is a means capable of causing the first movable portion to execute a first operation ( For example, Fig. 61),
The first driving means is means capable of causing the second movable portion to execute a second operation (for example, FIG. 61),
The first operation is an operation different from the second operation (for example, FIG. 61),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the movable part. Further, there are cases where various actions can be shown to the player while the number of driving means is reduced, and the interest of the player can be improved.

A2. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first operation is an operation in which the first movable part moves along a first trajectory (for example, OR3),
The second operation is an operation in which the second movable part moves along a second trajectory (for example, OR1 or OR2),
The first trajectory is a trajectory different from the second trajectory,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where various actions with different trajectories can be shown to the player.

A3. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first trajectory is a trajectory including a straight trajectory (for example, OR3),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, a simple operation may be shown to the player.

A4. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The second trajectory is a trajectory including a curved trajectory (e.g., OR1 or OR2),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, an unexpected motion may be shown to the player.

A5. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
At least a part of the operation period of the first operation is a period overlapping with at least a part of the operation period of the second operation.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since there is a period in which a plurality of movable parts operate simultaneously, there are cases where an interesting operation can be shown to the player.

A6. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The operation period of the first operation is the same period as the operation period of the second operation.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the plurality of movable parts operate at the same time, it may be possible to show an interesting operation to the player.

A7. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
Equipped with a movable body (for example, 1),
The movable body is a movable body including the first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body including the second movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body including the first driving means,
The movable body is a movable body that is movable.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where various actions can be shown to the player.

A8. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body including a third movable portion (for example, 12 or 11),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where various actions can be shown to the player.

A9. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first driving means is means capable of causing the third movable part to execute a third operation,
The third operation is an operation different from the first operation.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where various actions can be shown to the player while the number of driving means is reduced.

A10. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The third operation is an operation in which the third movable part moves along a third orbit (for example, OR3 or OR2),
The third trajectory is a trajectory including a curved trajectory,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, an unexpected motion may be shown to the player.

A11. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first movable portion is a movable portion whose position is different from that of the second movable portion in the front-rear direction of the game table.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to secure a movable space for each movable part.

A12. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the second movable part in the front-back direction of the game table.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is easy to secure a movable space for each movable part, a movement with a sense of depth may be performed, and a part of the movable part may not be visible during the movement. In some cases, an interesting operation can be performed.

A13. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
With a structure (e.g. 16),
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap at least a part of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
At least a part of the second movable part may overlap at least a part of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to secure a movable space for each movable part, and there may be a case where an operation with a sense of depth can be performed.

A14. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A display means (for example, 208) capable of displaying the first display;
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the first display in the front-back direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
At least a part of the second movable part may overlap at least a part of the first display in the front-rear direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the effect can be enhanced by the effect of the operation of the movable part and the display of the display means.

A15. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

A16. The game table of the above embodiment is
A slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

  A17. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The first trajectory may be a straight trajectory only. The first operation may be an operation including a translation operation. The first operation may be only a translation operation. The second trajectory may be a trajectory having only a curved trajectory. The second operation may be an operation including a rotation operation. The second operation may be an operation only of a rotation operation. The first trajectory and the second trajectory may be a trajectory including a common trajectory.

  The first movable part and the second movable part may operate as shown in FIG. 140 (a), for example. In the example of the figure, from the initial position where the movable part 1 and the movable part 2 are arranged side by side, the movable part 1 translates upward, and the movable part 2 pivots to become vertical. The example which changed into T shape is shown.

  The operation period of the first operation may not overlap with the operation period of the second operation. The operation period of the second operation may start after the start of the operation period of the first operation. The operation period of the first operation may start after the start of the operation period of the second operation. The operation period of the first operation may or may not overlap with the operation period of the third operation.

  The first movable part and the second movable part are part or all of a specific shape (for example, a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, a polygon, a character shape, a number shape, a face shape, a title, a mark) after the operation. May be represented.

  The first display is a hold display, a hold icon, a change icon, a notice icon, an icon area display, a decoration pattern, a fourth pattern, a mini decoration pattern, a notice display, a pre-read notice display, a tutorial display, a pseudo-continuous display, and a reach display. , Right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive games display, number of acquired balls, acquired number of displays, volume adjustment display, light intensity It may be at least one of adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door opening display, and abnormality occurrence display.

  The driving means may be means capable of operating three or more movable parts simultaneously. FIG. 140B shows an operation example of three movable parts. In the example of the figure, from the initial position where the movable parts 1 to 3 are vertically arranged in parallel and spaced apart from each other, the central movable part 2 is rotated to turn sideways, the left and right movable parts 1 and movable An example is shown in which the parts 3 are translated in directions close to each other, and as a whole, the shape changes from a letter III shape to an N shape and further changes to an H shape.

  The movable body may have a longer or shorter vertical width after operation than the vertical width before operation of the first movable portion and the second movable portion. But you can. In the movable body, the width in the left-right direction after operation may be shorter or longer than the width in the left-right direction before operation of the first movable portion and the second movable portion. But you can.

  The movable body may include driving means different from the driving means.

  The movable body may be a movable body that is movable in at least one of a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, and a front-back direction. The movable body may be a movable body capable of executing at least one of a vibration operation and a reciprocating operation.

  There is another movable body (for example, 2), and at least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the other movable body in the front-rear direction, and at least one of the second movable part. The part may overlap with at least a part of the other movable body in the front-rear direction. The other movable body may be a movable body that is movable in at least one of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction.

  The movable body (for example, 1) may include the structure (for example, 16). A part of the first movable part may always overlap the structure. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table. In a case where the second movable body is in the first state, a part of the second movable portion may overlap the structure, and in the second state, the second movable body is in the second state. The other part of the movable part may overlap the structure. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table.

  The first movable part may include one or a plurality of first light emitting means (for example, 14f). The second movable part may include one or a plurality of second light emitting means (for example, 11d or 12d). The third movable part may include one or a plurality of third light emitting means (for example, 12d or 11d). The structure may include one or a plurality of light emitting means (for example, 16b).

  The first light emitting means may overlap the structure during the operation of the first movable part. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table. The second light emitting unit may overlap at least one of the structure and the first movable part during the operation of the second movable part. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table. The third light emitting unit may overlap at least one of the structure and the first movable part during the operation of the third movable part. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table.

  The first movable part may have a first non-transmissive part (for example, a part of 14h), and a part of the first light emitting means is the first non-transmissive part in the longitudinal direction of the game table. It may be located behind the part. The second movable part may have a second non-transmissive part (for example, a part of 11f or 12f), and a part of the second light emitting means is arranged in the front-rear direction of the game table. It may be located behind the non-transmissive portion. The third movable part may have a third non-transmissive part (for example, a part of 12f or 11f), and a part of the third light emitting means is arranged in the front-rear direction of the game table. It may be located behind the non-transmissive portion.

  The movable body may be a triangle-shaped movable body (for example, FIG. 61 (c)). The triangular movable body may be provided with another movable body (for example, 2), and the separate movable body may be a deployable movable body (for example, FIG. 64). When viewed from the front, there may be a case where the partial outline of the movable movable object may be seen as a tangent to the partial outline of the triangular movable object. The movable part may be an arm part. The arm portion of the triangular movable object at the initial position may overlap with a part of the arm portion of the deployable movable object at the initial position. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table. The arm portion of the triangular movable object at the initial position may not overlap with another part of the arm portion of the deployable movable object at the initial position. The non-overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table. The arm portion of the triangular movable object at the initial position may overlap all the arm portions of the deployable movable object at the initial position. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game table.

The time until the triangle of the triangle forming agent is completed may be faster, slower, or the same as the time until the unfolding operation of the unfolding movable object is completed. The time for the triangle forming object to fall from the initial position to the maximum movement position by driving the motor may be faster than the time for the unfolding movable object to fall from the initial position to the maximum movement position by driving the motor, It may be late or the same. The time for the triangle forming object to rise from the maximum movement position to the initial position by driving the motor may be faster than the time for the unfolding movable object to rise from the maximum movement position to the initial position by driving the motor, It may be late or the same. In the state where the triangle forming movable object overlaps with the deployable movable object, the deployable movable object may perform the light emitting effect while the triangle forming movable object performs the light emitting effect, and a part of the light emission mode is common. May be. At this time, only a part of the LEDs of the movable movable object may emit light, and the other part of the LEDs may not emit light. The overlapped state may be a state where they overlap in the front-rear direction of the game table. The unfolding movable object may perform the light emission effect while the triangle forming movable object performs the light emission effect and the vibration effect.
A21. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A plurality of driving means (for example, 15a, 43A);
A first movable part (e.g. 14);
A second movable part (e.g. 11 or 12);
A structure (e.g. 16),
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of driving means (hereinafter referred to as “first driving means” (for example, 15a)) is a means capable of causing the first movable portion to execute a first operation. (E.g. Fig. 61),
The first driving means is means capable of causing the second movable portion to execute a second operation (for example, FIG. 61),
The first operation is an operation different from the second operation (for example, FIG. 61),
The structure is a structure whose position does not change during the first operation (for example, FIG. 62),
It is characterized by that.
A22. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The structure is a structure whose position does not change during the second operation (for example, FIG. 62),
It is characterized by that.
A23. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first part of the first movable part is a part having different visibility in front view after the first action and after the first action (for example, FIG. 62),
The second part of the second movable part is a part having different visibility in front view before the second action and after the second action (for example, FIG. 62),
It is characterized by that.
A24. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
Of the first part and the second part, one is easier to see in front view after operation than before operation, and the other is easier to see in front view than after operation. (For example, Fig. 62),
It is characterized by that.
A25. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap at least a part of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
At least a part of the second movable part may overlap at least a part of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
It is characterized by that.
A26. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first operation is an operation in which the first movable part moves along a first trajectory (for example, OR3),
The second operation is an operation in which the second movable part moves along a second trajectory (for example, OR1 or OR2),
The first trajectory is a trajectory different from the second trajectory,
It is characterized by that.
A27. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first trajectory is a trajectory including a straight trajectory (for example, OR3),
It is characterized by that.
A28. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The second trajectory is a trajectory including a curved trajectory (e.g., OR1 or OR2),
It is characterized by that.
A29. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
At least a part of the operation period of the first operation is a period overlapping with at least a part of the operation period of the second operation.
It is characterized by that.
A30. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The operation period of the first operation is the same period as the operation period of the second operation.
It is characterized by that.
A31. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
Equipped with a movable body (for example, 1),
The movable body is a movable body including the first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body including the second movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body including the first driving means,
The movable body is a movable body including the structure,
The movable body is a movable body that is movable.
It is characterized by that.
A32. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body including a third movable portion (for example, 12 or 11),
It is characterized by that.
A33. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first driving means is means capable of causing the third movable part to execute a third operation,
The third operation is an operation different from the first operation.
It is characterized by that.
A34. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The third operation is an operation in which the third movable part moves along a third orbit (for example, OR3 or OR2),
The third trajectory is a trajectory including a curved trajectory,
It is characterized by that.
A35. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first movable portion is a movable portion whose position is different from that of the second movable portion in the front-rear direction of the game table.
It is characterized by that.
A36. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the second movable part in the front-back direction of the game table.
It is characterized by that.
A37. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A display means (for example, 208) capable of displaying the first display;
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the first display in the front-back direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
At least a part of the second movable part may overlap at least a part of the first display in the front-rear direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 63),
It is characterized by that.
A38. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.
A39. The game table of the above embodiment is
A slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

B1. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A movable body (for example, 1),
Driving means capable of driving the movable body (for example, 43A);
A game machine equipped with
Comprising regulation means (for example, 42) capable of regulating the operation of the movable body,
The restricting means is a means different from the driving means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the regulation of the operation of the movable body. Further, there are cases where an unintended operation of the movable body can be prevented, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented. In addition, if necessary, it may be possible to operate with the restriction removed.

B2. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The restriction means is a means capable of executing the release of the restriction (for example, FIG. 63 (a)),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to operate the regulated movable body.

B3. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The restricting means is a means capable of executing restriction of the movement of the movable body in the first direction.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, an unintended operation of the movable body may be prevented in the first direction.

B4. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first orientation is downward;
It is characterized by that.

  According to this structure, the operation | movement of the direction where gravity is applied may be able to be controlled.

B5. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body capable of performing an operation in a second direction (e.g., upward) during the execution of the regulation by the regulation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to perform only necessary regulation without regulating all the operations of the movable body.

B6. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing the operation in the first direction after performing the operation in the second direction.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where the operation in the first direction can be performed by interposing the operation in the second direction even during the execution of the restriction by the restriction means.

B7. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A gear (for example, 41C) that can be driven by the driving means,
The movable body is a movable body that may operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear,
The restricting means is means capable of executing restriction of the operation range of the gear.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the operation may be restricted with a relatively simple configuration.

B8. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The regulating means is a means provided with another driving means (for example, 42A) different from the driving means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the restricting means may be driven independently.

B9. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The other driving means is a solenoid,
During execution of the restriction by the restriction means, the solenoid is in a non-excited state,
While the release of the restriction by the restriction means is being performed, the solenoid is in an excited state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, power consumption may be reduced.

B10. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation during the execution of the release.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the first operation may be executed by the release.

B11. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first operation is a vibration operation.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced.

B12. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

B13. The game table of the above embodiment is
A slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

  B14. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The movable body may be a movable body that may not operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear. The movable body may be a movable body capable of executing an operation in the first direction when the movable body does not operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear.

  When the solenoid is de-energized, rotation of the gear may be applied to the restricting means. When the rotation direction of the gear is the first direction, the restriction member of the restriction means is maintained at the restriction position, and when the rotation direction is the second direction, the restriction member is displaced from the restriction position to the non-regulation position. Also good.

  A cover (for example, 40A) that covers the restricting means may be provided, and one or a plurality of openings (for example, 40a) may be formed in the cover, and the restricting means can be contacted from outside through the openings. Also good.

  Another movable body (for example, 2) may be provided, and a regulating means (for example, 52) may be provided for the other movable body.

  Two or more restriction means may be provided for the movable body, and the restriction range of the operation of the movable body by each restriction means may be different or the same.

  The restricting means may be composed of another movable body (for example, 3), and restricts an operation range of the movable body by contacting a part of the movable body with a part of the movable body. May be.

C1. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A game machine with an operable movable body (for example, 2),
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L1 or L2),
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion (for example, 23),
The first light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in a first state (for example, state B in FIG. 64),
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable part in a second state (for example, state D in FIG. 64).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the movable body. Moreover, the way of showing the light emitting means can be changed depending on the state, and the player's interest can be improved.

C2. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting unit is a unit that overlaps the first movable part in an initial state (for example, state A in FIG. 64).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the way of showing the light emitting means can be further varied depending on the state.

C3. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, FIG. 64),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the way of showing the light emitting means can be continuously changed depending on the state.

C4. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light in the second state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this structure, even if it overlaps with the first movable part, an effect by the light of the first light emitting means may be possible.

C5. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L3),
The second light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in the first state (for example, state B in FIG. 64),
The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the first movable part in the second state (for example, state D in FIG. 64),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the player's interest may be improved by the light emitting means that overlaps the first movable part and the light emitting means that does not overlap.

C6. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means (for example, L2 or L1),
The movable body is a movable body having a second movable portion (for example, 23),
The third light emitting means is means that does not overlap the second movable part in the first state (for example, state B in FIG. 64),
The third light emitting means is means that overlaps the second movable part in the second state (for example, state D in FIG. 64),
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the light emitting means can be displayed differently depending on the state, and the interest of the player may be improved.

C7. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first movable part is a movable part having a light emitting substrate (for example, 23b),
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in an initial state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the light emitting means can be displayed differently depending on the state.

C8. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means for overlapping the light emitting substrate in the second state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the light emitting means can be displayed differently depending on the state.

C9. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first movable part is a movable part having a cover (for example, 23e),
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the cover in an initial state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the light emitting means can be displayed differently depending on the state.

C10. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover in the second state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the light emitting means can be displayed differently depending on the state.

C11. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

C12. The game table of the above embodiment is
A slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

  C13. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The first movable portion may be a movable portion capable of executing a first operation while transitioning from the initial state to the second state. The second movable part may be a movable part capable of executing a second operation during the transition from the initial state to the second state. The first operation may include a rotation operation or a translation operation. The first operation may include a deployment operation. The second operation may include a rotation operation or a translation operation. The second operation may include a deployment operation.

  The position of the first light emitting means may be different between the position in the initial state and the position in the second state, or may be the same. The position of the second light emitting means may be the same or different between the position in the initial state and the position in the second state. The position of the third light emitting means may be different between the position in the initial state and the position in the second state, or may be the same. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that overlaps the first movable unit or the second movable unit in the initial state.

  The first light-emitting means is in the order of the initial state, the first state, and the second state, with or without overlap, with or without overlap, without or without overlap, with or without overlap, without overlap There may be none, no overlap, no overlap, there is no overlap, there is no overlap, there is no overlap, and there is no overlap.

  The second light emitting means is in the order of the initial state, the first state, and the second state, with or without overlap, with or without overlap, with or without overlap, with or without overlap, without overlap There may be none, no overlap, no overlap, there is no overlap, there is no overlap, there is no overlap, and there is no overlap.

  The third light-emitting means is in the order of the initial state, the first state, and the second state, with or without overlap, with or without overlap, with or without overlap, with or without overlap, without overlap There may be none, no overlap, no overlap, there is no overlap, there is no overlap, there is no overlap, and there is no overlap.

  FIG. 140 (c) shows a change mode of overlap between the movable portion 1 and the light emitting means 2. The example in the figure shows an example in which the movable part 1 rotates and stops overlapping after the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2 overlap, and the movable part 1 further rotates and overlaps again. ing.

  FIG. 140 (d) shows how the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2 overlap. In any example, one of the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2 may move, or both may move. Moreover, a part or all of the movable part 1 may have a transmission part, and a part or all of the movable part 1 may be a half mirror.

  In the example of (d-1), since the movable unit 1 and the light emitting unit 2 are overlapped, the light emitting unit 2 is moved but the overlapped state is continued. An example of no longer wrapping is shown.

  In the example of (d-2), the light emitting means 2 is moved and overlapped with the movable portion 1 from the state where the movable portion 1 and the light emitting means 2 do not overlap, and the light emitting means 2 further moves. Also shows an example in which the overlap continues.

  In the example of (d-3), the light emitting means 2 moves from the state where the movable portion 1 and the light emitting means 2 do not overlap, and the movable portion 1 overlaps, and the light emitting means 2 further moves. This shows an example where no overlap occurs.

  In the example of (d-4), since the movable unit 1 and the light emitting means 2 are overlapped, the light emitting means 2 is moved, but the overlapped state is continued. An example in which the wrapped state is continued is shown.

  In the example of (d-5), the movable part 3 moves from the state in which the plurality of movable parts 1 and 3 and the light emitting means 2 overlap, and does not overlap with the light emitting means 2. An example is shown in which the light emitting means 2 has moved and all the three members do not overlap.

  A cover (for example, 22C) having a non-transmissive portion may be provided in front of the first light emitting means.

  The longest second width of the end portion of the first movable portion and the end portion of the second movable portion in the second state is the end portion of the first movable portion in the first state. The width may be longer than the longest first width of the end of the second movable part, or may be shorter.

  The movable region of the movable body may be shorter or longer in the downward distance from the center of the movable body than in the lateral direction from the center of the movable body.

  The movable body is a movable body having a rotating part (for example, 21A), and the rotating part may be a rotating part having the first movable part and the second movable part, and the rotating part is The rotating part may be rotatable while repeating the first state and the second state.

When the first movable part and the second movable part are positioned above and below, the second state comes into contact with another structure (for example, another movable body or a center accessory). It may be a positional relationship. Moreover, the positional relationship which contacts when it is located in right and left may be sufficient.
C21. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A game machine with an operable movable body (for example, 2),
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L1 or L2),
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L3),
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion (for example, 23),
The first light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in a first state (for example, state B in FIG. 64),
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable part in a second state (for example, state D in FIG. 64),
The second light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in the first state,
The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the first movable part in the second state,
The substrate on which the first light emitting means is mounted (for example, 22B) is a substrate on which the second light emitting means is also mounted,
In some cases, at least a part of the movable body overlaps at least a part of the display means (e.g., 208) (FIGS. 64-68),
It is characterized by that .
C22. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light in the second state,
In the second state, the first light emitting unit is a unit that is overlapped with the first movable part.
It is characterized by that .
C23. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, 16),
It is characterized by that .
C24. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the first movable part in an initial state (for example, state A in FIG. 64).
It is characterized by that .
C25. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, FIG. 64),
It is characterized by that .
C26. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means (for example, L2 or L1),
The movable body is a movable body having a second movable portion (for example, 23),
The third light emitting means is means that does not overlap the second movable part in the first state (for example, state B in FIG. 64),
The third light emitting means is means that overlaps the second movable part in the second state (for example, state D in FIG. 64),
It is characterized by that .
C27. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first movable part is a movable part having a light emitting substrate (for example, 23b),
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in an initial state.
It is characterized by that .
C28. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means for overlapping the light emitting substrate in the second state.
It is characterized by that.
C29. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first movable part is a movable part having a cover (for example, 23e),
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the cover in an initial state.
It is characterized by that .
C30. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover in the second state.
It is characterized by that .
C31. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable part (for example, FIG. 64).
It is characterized by that .
C32. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable part.
It is characterized by that .
C33. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
Provided with a game board (e.g. 201B) having game nails,
The movable body is a movable body that can operate behind the game board (for example, FIG. 50),
It is characterized by that .
C34. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that .
C35. The game table of the above embodiment is
A slot machine,
It is characterized by that .

D1. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A game machine with an operable movable body (for example, 3),
The movable body is a movable body having a base portion (for example, 30),
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L11),
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L12, L13),
The first light emitting means is a means that cannot change a relative position with the base portion,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing a relative position with the base portion.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the movable body. Further, there are cases where the way of showing the plurality of light emitting means can be made different, and the interest of the player can be improved.

D2. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a cover body (for example, 31),
The first light emitting means is a means that cannot change a relative position with the cover body,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing a relative position with the cover body.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the plurality of light emitting means may be displayed differently, and the player's interest may be improved.

D3. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body that overlaps the first light emitting means,
The cover body is a cover body that overlaps with the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the light emitting means can be displayed differently through the cover body.

D4. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having display means (for example, 34),
The display means is means including the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the display means may be displayed differently.

D5. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The display means is means including the first light emitting means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the display means may be displayed differently.

D6. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The second light emitting means is a means that cannot change a relative position with the first light emitting means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to change the way the plurality of light emitting means are displayed.

D7. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The display means is a means capable of executing display in a state where the movable body is located at a position different from the initial position (for example, FIGS. 70 (b) (c)).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the display unit may be used as an internal information notification unit.

D8. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The display means is means capable of executing display in a state where the movable body is located at the initial position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the display unit may be used as an internal information suggestion unit.

D9. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body having a first portion (for example, 31a),
The movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a means that cannot change the relative position with the cover body,
The first part is a part overlapping the third light emitting means,
The first portion is a portion that is at least partially opaque.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to change the way the plurality of light emitting means are displayed.

D10. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body having a second portion (for example, 31b),
The second part is a part overlapping the second light emitting means,
The second part is a transparent part,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to change the way the plurality of light emitting means are displayed.

D11. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that cannot change the relative position with a first part (for example, any part of 30) of the base part,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing a relative position with the first part.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the plurality of light emitting means may be displayed differently, and the player's interest may be improved.

D12. The gaming table (e.g., 100) in the above embodiment is
A pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

D13. The game table of the above embodiment is
A slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

  D14. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The movable body may include a substrate (for example, 34), the substrate may be a substrate having the first light emitting means, and the substrate may be a substrate having the second light emitting means. The first light emitting unit may be a unit positioned at the center of the substrate. The substrate may be a rotatable substrate. The first light emitting unit may be a unit positioned at the rotation center of the substrate. The display means may be a means capable of displaying by rotating the substrate.

  The substrate may be a substrate in which a plurality of the second light emitting units are arranged in at least one row (for example, LA). Said 2nd light emission means may be arrange | positioned on a straight line, and may be arrange | positioned on a curve. The substrate may be a substrate in which a plurality of the second light emitting units are arranged in two or more rows, and the second light emitting units in adjacent rows do not overlap when the substrate rotates. (For example, FIG. 69 (b)). The color of the resist (solder resist) on the substrate may be black. The silk printing color of the substrate may be black.

  The rotation axis (for example, AX) of the board may be at least one of the front-rear direction, the vertical direction, and the left-right direction of the game table.

  The third light emitting means may be a means that may be located on an extension line of a row of the plurality of second light emitting means (for example, FIGS. 69 (b) (c)).

  The opaque part may be displayed with any one of letters, numbers, marks, and icons.

  The first part may have a lens shape.

  The second light emitting means (for example, L13) may be a means capable of moving rearward of the first part. The second light emitting means may be a means that can move to the rear of the first portion having the lens shape.

  The change in the relative position may be rotation or rotation or translation. FIG. 140 (e) shows an example of a change in the relative position of the light emitting means. In the example shown in the figure, the light emitting means 2 translates from the state in which the base portion 3 and the light emitting means 1 and 2 are located at the initial position, and the relative position changes with respect to the base portion 3. An example in which the relative position is not displaced with respect to the portion 3 is shown.

<Embodiment C>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  75 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 74 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the top of the effect device 206 to the right, and a game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. In other words, the game area 124 has a first flow path on the left side across the effect device 206 as a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down, and a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down. And a second flow path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first downstream path may be referred to as “left-handed”, and hitting a game ball on the second downstream path may be referred to as “right-handed”.

  The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center, an effect movable body 224 provided at the upper portion thereof, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a lower portion thereof. A second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In FIG. 76, the effect movable body 224 is in an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that demarcates the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the initial position, the effect movable body 224 cannot be visually recognized by the player. ing. The effect movable body 224 is moved by a drive system (not shown) in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a display screen front plane). It can be done. The configuration and drive system of the effect movable body 224 will be described later with reference to the drawings.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and 208 d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally long rectangular display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a first general figure starting port 227, a second general figure starting port 229, and a special figure 1 starting port 230, around the rendering device 206. A special figure 2 starting port 232 and a variable winning port 234 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The first general map start port 227 and the second general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. . In the present embodiment, the first general start port 227 is arranged in the first downstream path on the left side with the rendering device 206 in between, and the second universal channel in the second downstream path on the right side with the rendering device 206 in between. A starting port 229 is disposed. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball can pass through the first general figure starting port 227 by left-handed, and the game ball can pass through the second general figure starting port 229 by right-handed. A ball that has passed through the first general start port 227 or the second general start port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side, unlike a ball that has entered the general winning port 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first general map start port 227 or the second general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210. . In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the first normal start port 227 during a period other than a predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, during the execution of the super reach effect, or during the big hit game) The pachinko machine 100 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the general symbol decorative symbol variation game with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew). In the present embodiment, only one starting port 232 is arranged below the second general-purpose starting port 229. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Since the second general map start port 229 and the special figure 2 start port 232 below the second general map start port 229 are in the second flow path on the right side across the effect device 206, the first flow down path on the left side across the effect device 206 The game ball that has advanced to does not pass through the second general start port 229 or enter the special view 2 start port 232. In addition, since the first general map start port 229 and the special figure 1 start port 230 are in the first downflow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between, the first general start port 229 and the special figure 1 start port 230 are in the second downflow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between. The advanced game ball does not pass through the first ordinary start port 227 or enter the special view 1 start port 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the special figure 1 starting opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) or without winning any winning port or start port, or the first general start port 227, the second general start port 229 It reaches the out port 240 only by passing.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing start port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected to this.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect movable body 224, and a movable object 703 to be described later. A drive circuit 422 for performing drive control, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position and initial position of the effect movable body 224 and the movable object 703, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, A sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from a predetermined detection sensor, for example, the effect movable body sensor 424 or the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data are connected. ing. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. . A driving circuit for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the basic circuit.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment are stopped and displayed. The types of ordinary maps will be described. FIG. 78 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 78 (a), ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 78 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbols, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D” are 15R jackpot symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variable game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to an electric support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). Although the electric support state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the electric support state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the electric support state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 15R special jackpot symbols, are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”, which are 15R jackpot symbols, are special It is a low probability normal figure high probability state. These “special chart A”, “special chart B”, “special chart C”, and “special chart D” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden change. Sudden probability change will be in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called hidden probability change. The hidden probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latent probability change state) after the big hit game ends. The hidden probability change does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small bonus symbol. After the small hit game ends, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (which may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state) is obtained. In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as “Special Figure E” and “Special Figure F” (in this embodiment, twice).

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a lottery to determine whether or not the winning determination is a big hit, and thereafter, after displaying the symbol variation based on the determination result, the “special drawing A” is displayed. ~ "Special Figure J" is configured to determine whether to stop display on Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 display devices 212 and 214. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, the special figure certain change state) The presence / absence of the power supply and the presence / absence of the electric support state are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this. For example, apart from the determination of the stop symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game may be determined by lottery. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the stop symbol is determined, for example, while determining the profit state after the jackpot game by lottery, The profit status may be appropriately associated.

  FIG. 78 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R big hit and 15R special big hit, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 2-decoration”). 2-decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) To stop display.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special figure F” hidden probability change, “special figure G” and “special figure H” small hit, stop “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” indicate. Further, when a 2R jackpot called “sudden change of“ special drawing E ”is notified,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol I and the special symbol J, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 78B is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

  FIG. 78 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stoppage display modes: “general symbol A”, which is a winning symbol 1, “general symbol B”, which is a winning symbol 2, and “general symbol C” which is an outlier symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to win and determination of a stop symbol in a general variable game are performed by lottery of software random numbers. For example, the winning symbols 1 and 2 are different in the opening pattern of the special symbol 2 starting port 232 (electric Chu). Based on the detection of the above-described gate sensor that the sphere has passed through the first general map start port 227 or the second general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 is configured to turn on all seven segments, The “variable display of the usual map” is performed by repeatedly lighting one segment in the center. Then, when notifying the winning of the usual figure variable game, the "usual figure A" or "common figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the "normal figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 78 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows an example of a decorative pattern for normal symbols. There are three types of decorative symbols for ordinary symbols of the present embodiment: “common figure decoration 1”, “common figure decoration 2”, and “common figure decoration 3”. The general figure decoration 1 has, for example, a design pattern that recalls “○”, the general figure decoration 2 has a design aspect that recalls, for example, “◎”, and the common figure decoration 3 has, for example, “x”. It has a reminiscent pattern. On condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor has detected that a ball has passed through the first normal opening 227 except for a predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the big hit game) On the decorative symbol display device 208, a general symbol decorative symbol change game in which the display is switched in the order of “common symbol ornament 1” → “common symbol ornament 2” → “common symbol ornament 3”... Is performed with a predetermined probability.

  In order to notify the hit of “common figure A”, the “normal figure decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the deviation of “general map C”, “general map decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the main process of the main control unit executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 79 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 77 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). Or the first prize opening 227 or the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, It is determined that there has been a passage through the second ordinary start port 229. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 226 and 234 and these starting openings 230, 232, 227, and 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated. In the initial value generating random number of the main process of the main control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the initial value of the random number counter for generating the random number value for determining the general symbol used in the normal symbol determination lottery is generated. The initial value generation random number counter is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the routine determination random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the routine determination random number value provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is set to 1. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  Further, in the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process, a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value used in the main control unit 300, and a common figure for generating a normal winning random number value are used. The winning random number counter and the universal determination random number counter for generating the universal determination random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  Further, for example, if a numerical value range that can be taken as a normal winning random number value is 0 to 65535, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is set to the acquired value. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 65536, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 65535, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the normal number winning random number value, and the normal number winning random number value is generated. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value has made one round next.

  Also, for example, if a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value for determining a normal map is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for determining a normal map provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value 1 is added to and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for determining a customary figure that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the stored initial value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general purpose determination random number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating random numbers for general-purpose determination next makes one round. Keep it.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure fluctuation time determination random value counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time determination random value value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special figure fluctuation game or the initial value thereof is updated. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game is, for example, 20000 ms in the usual figure low probability state and 1000 ms in the usual figure high probability state. The pachinko machine 100 may determine the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game by lottery using a predetermined table, and generates a random number value for determining the usual figure fluctuation time for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the usual figure variable game. It is also possible to update the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal fluctuation time or the initial value thereof.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226 and 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 227, and 229 are won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the first general figure starting port 227, the second general figure starting port 229, and the variable winning port 234. . Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A jackpot determination random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A set of random numbers for jackpot determination and a special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is a special figure. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit A special jackpot determination random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the special figure 2 of 318 is acquired, and the special jackpot special feature provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. The big hit special figure determining random value is acquired from the figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 random value for determining big hit and random figure for determining special figure for big hit (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 starting information") Are stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the first general figure start opening 227 or the second general figure start opening 229 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is transferred from the normal figure winning random number counter. It is acquired as a winning random number value and stored in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general chart state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the flag for the first normal map is ON, When the second common symbol flag is turned on so that the display mode of symbol 1 (common figure A) is turned on, when the outlier flag is turned on so as to be displayed on the winning symbol 2 (common figure B). The 7-segment LED composing the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the display pattern of the extraordinary symbol (common figure C) is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in the display mode. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general symbol display device 210 confirms display of one of the symbols of the winning symbol 1 (common symbol A), the winning symbol 2 (FIG. 78 common symbol B), and the off symbol (common symbol C). I do. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a win, either the first ordinary figure hit flag or the second ordinary figure hit flag is turned on based on the usual figure determination result. When the flag for the first and second maps is on, the diagram status update at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the diagram stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the processing, the normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) (part of various solenoids 332). ), A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off as will be described later. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined (determination of whether or not to change the ordinary game) is performed. When the result of the hit determination is a win, the symbol is determined by random number lottery based on the random number value for determining the normal symbol stored in the random value storage area. When the universal symbol determination result is the winning symbol 1, the first universal symbol flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and when the universal symbol determination result is the winning symbol 2, the second universal symbol provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the hit flag on. When the result of the hit determination is out of place, the usual off-set flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time in the normal high probability state is 1000 ms, and the normal symbol variation time in the normal low probability state is 20000 ms. When determining the symbol variation time of the usual figure by lottery, obtain the value of the random number value counter for determining the ordinary diagram variation time for generating the random value for determining the ordinary diagram variation time as the random value for determining the ordinary diagram variation time, Based on the acquired random number value for determining the normal map change time, one time for displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is selected as the normal map change display time. Is stored in a normal variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 76 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A or special figure B, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 78 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is When ON, special figure C or special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure If the probability variation flag is also on, the ordinary probability variation flag is off, special figure F, if the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, if the second small hit flag is on, special figure H When the first loss flag is on, special figure I, When the 2 off flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off to control the special figure J so that the special figure J is turned on, and the special figure 2 is stopped in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to indicate that it is being displayed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A, special figure B), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure C, special figure D), and a sudden probability change symbol (special figure E). , Hidden Probability Design (Special Figure F), 1st Small Bonus Design (Special Figure G), 2nd Small Bonus Design (Special Figure H), 1st Missing Design (Special Figure I), and 1st Missing Design (Special Figure) J) Confirm the display of any one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is held in the open state by the solenoid for driving to open / close the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to the solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and information indicating the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. Here, the short-time state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, special chart probability variation flag values, and special chart related items. It includes information indicating the variation time of the special figure variation game selected in the lottery process, and in the case of the symbol variation stop command, includes the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. In the case of a win effect command and an end effect start command, it includes the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Yes. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variable game selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 subsequent to step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, if pressing of the chance button is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315 subsequent to step S313, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317 following step S315, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 following step S317, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of other effect random numbers, and the like are performed.

  Next, the structure and operation of the effect movable body used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front as in FIG. FIG. 82 shows the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the effect movable body 224 descends from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where it is stopped.

  The effect movable body 224 has a shape imitating a sword, for example, and the blade faces upward and the sword's cutting edge is located on the right side with respect to the rectangular opening frame defining the display area of the decorative design display device 208. There is a sword handle on the top. The effect movable body 224 can move up and down within the rectangular opening frame while maintaining this arrangement relationship. In addition, the effect movable body 224 moves from the upper side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame and becomes invisible at the initial position. Note that the effect movable body 224 may be moved from the lower side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame at the maximum lowered position so that it cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 83 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front as in FIG. 83, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 82, and the movable object 703 simulating a blade is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with the central portion of the base 701 as the center of rotation. Is shown.

  Next, the structure of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the side closer to the player with the pachinko machine 100 installed in the island facility of the amusement store is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front end, etc.), and vice versa. , Rear side, rear end, etc.), as viewed from the player, the vertical top is “up” (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa is “lower” (lower, lower, lower end, etc.) When viewed from the viewer, the horizontal left is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right, right end, etc.). FIG. 84 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side. FIG. 85 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 84 (a) and 85 (a) show a case where the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position. In the movable object unit 700, a right drive system base 713 and a left drive system base 712 having elongated metal plates are opposed to each other in the left-right direction, and an upper end of the right drive system base 713 and an upper end of the left drive system base 712 are connected to the elongated metal plate. Connected at 710, the lower end of the right drive system base 713 and the lower end of the left drive system base 712 are connected by a connecting member 711 of an elongated metal plate and assembled into a rectangular frame shape.

  A guide member 717 having an elongated cylindrical metal rod is fixed to the right drive system base 713 along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). A motor mr is disposed at the lower end of the right drive system base 713, a gear gr1 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor mr, and a gear gr2 is meshed with the gear gr1. A pulley pr is disposed at the upper end of the right drive system base 713, and a belt vr is bridged between the pulley pr and the gear gr2. The belt vr is stretched in parallel with the direction in which the guide member 717 extends.

  A guided member 721 is attached so as to be slidable around a cylindrical metal rod of the guide member 717. The guided member 721 is fixed to the belt vr. By driving the motor mr and moving the belt vr, the guided member 721 fixed to the belt vr is guided by the guide member 717 and can move in the vertical direction along the columnar member of the guide member 717. . A movable body right end holding member (not shown) that holds the right end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 721.

  A guide member 715 having a cylindrical metal rod that is elongated along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) is fixed to the left drive system base 712. A motor ml is disposed at the lower end of the left drive system base 712, a gear gl1 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor ml, and a gear gl2 is engaged with the gear gl1. A pulley pl is disposed at the upper end of the left drive system base 712, and a belt vl is bridged between the pulley pl and the gear gl2. The belt vl is stretched in parallel with the direction in which the guide member 715 extends.

  A guided member 719 is attached so as to be slidable around a cylindrical metal rod of the guide member 715. The guided member 719 is fixed to the belt vl. By driving the motor ml and moving the belt vl, the guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl is guided by the guide member 715 and can move in the vertical direction along the columnar member of the guide member 715. . A movable body left end holding member (not shown) that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 719.

  A motor 723 that rotates the movable object 703 around the center of the base 701 is fixed to the right end of the effect movable body 224. 84 (b) and 85 (b) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is translated downward from the initial position by a predetermined distance in synchronization with the right drive system and the left drive system in cooperation. Yes. 84 (c) and 85 (c) show that the movable object 703 is rotated while the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view (part) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. Although illustration is omitted, a similar configuration is also provided in the right drive system of the movable object unit 700. The guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl and slidably holding the guide member 715 is provided with a box-shaped region, and the box-shaped region is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the guided member 719. A claw portion 725 that can protrude by a predetermined distance in the direction to be accommodated is accommodated. The tip of the claw portion 725 is formed in a wedge shape. In addition, the upper end of the claw portion 725 has a slope that can contact a pin 729 described later. A spring 723 that contacts the rear end of the claw portion 725 is disposed in the box-shaped region. The claw portion 725 is always urged in the protruding direction by the action of the spring 723. The box-shaped region accommodates the claw portion 725 and the spring 723 and is closed with a lid member 727.

  A movable body left end holding member 731 that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is slidably attached to the guide member 715 below the guided member 719. The movable body left end holding member 731 is formed with a claw portion 731 a having a wedge-shaped tip that can be engaged with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719.

  When the movable body left end holding member 731 holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 is positioned at the lowermost end of the guide member 715, the motor ml is rotated in a predetermined direction to move the belt vl. The member 719 is lowered, and the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 can be engaged. Thereby, the movable body left end holding member 731 can be connected to the guided member 719. When the motor ml is rotated in the other direction after the engagement is completed to move the belt vl to raise the guided member 719, the movable body left end holding member 731 connected to the guided member 719 is also raised together. By similarly driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700, the effect movable body 224 positioned at the lowermost end can be pulled up.

  A pin 729 protrudes and is fixed at a position above the left drive system base 712 by a predetermined distance above the initial position of the effect movable body 224 and at a position where it can come into contact with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 rises beyond the initial position and makes the claw portion 725 contact (collision) with the pin 729, the pin 729 moves the claw portion 725 by a predetermined amount in the direction of being pushed into the box member side. Accordingly, the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 can be separated. By similarly driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700, the effect movable body 224 positioned at the uppermost position can be freely dropped.

  In order to return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position, the guided member 719 is moved to the movable body left end holding member 731 located at the lowermost end to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a, and then the guided member 719 is engaged. And moving the effect movable body 224 to the initial position by performing the same operation in synchronization with the right drive system.

  FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view (part) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to this embodiment as viewed from the back side. 87 (b) to 87 (d) show the circular portion of FIG. 87 (a) in an enlarged manner. 87 (b) to 87 (d), the engagement release operation of the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a by the pin 729 will be described. FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which the guided member 719 holding the movable body left end holding member 731 is moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position by driving of the drive system. The claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 are engaged. Further, the bottom portion of the pin 729 is in contact with the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 moves further upward, the fixed bottom portion of the pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719, so that the claw portion 725 engages with the claw portion 731 a of the movable body left end holding member 731. It is moved in the direction to cancel.

  FIG. 87 (c) shows that the guided member 719 moves further upward, and the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a. Indicates a state in which is resolved.

  FIG. 87D shows that the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 are separated and movable. The body left end holding member 731 is shown in the middle of free fall.

  FIG. 88 is a front view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 88A shows a state in which the movable object 703 is at an initial position where it is not displaced with respect to the base 701. FIG. 88B shows a state in which the movable object 703 is displaced by a predetermined angle counterclockwise with the central portion of the base portion 701 as the center of rotation. For driving the movable object 703, a drive system using a motor 723, a pulley and a belt (not shown) is used. FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which the movable object 703 has rotated the maximum angle counterclockwise. The movable object 703 includes an LED substrate inside, and can produce an effect of causing the LED to emit light.

  FIG. 89 is an external perspective view of the rendering movable body 224 according to this embodiment as viewed from the back side. A belt vc is stretched over a gear gc that transmits the rotation of a motor 723 (not shown) at the right end of the base 701 and a gear (not shown) that is rotatably fixed to a central portion 703c of the base 701. A movable object 703 is connected to the gear of the central portion 703c. By rotating the motor 723, the belt vc is driven and the gear of the central portion 703c is rotated, whereby the movable object 703 can be rotated relative to the base 701.

  On the left side of the central portion 703c of the base portion 701, a photosensor 740 in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are disposed to face each other with a space portion 740a interposed therebetween is disposed. The photosensor 740 includes a light emitting element and a light receiving element that are arranged to face each other with the space 740a interposed therebetween. The light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown in FIG. 89) are directed toward the space part 740a so that the light path from the light emitting part to the light receiving part is in the horizontal front-rear direction with the pachinko machine 100 installed in an island facility or the like. Has been placed. In order to prevent the light emitted from the decorative symbol display device 208 located on the rear side of the effect movable body 224 from entering the light receiving portion of the light receiving element of the photosensor 740, for example, a black resin having a predetermined width is provided behind the light receiving element. The light-impermeable member used is provided. In this example, a wall portion 740b behind a part of the light receiving elements of the housing of the photosensor 740 is used as a light opaque member.

  In the vicinity of the photosensor 740, a shutter 750 including a light shielding piece 750c that shields light that enters the space 740a of the photosensor 740 and is emitted from the light emitting element so as not to be received by the light receiving element is attached. The shutter 750 is fixed rotatably at a rotation center 750a. A projecting piece abutting portion 750b with which the projecting piece 703s provided on the movable object 703 can abut is provided on the opposite side of the light shielding piece 750c with respect to the rotation center 750a. The rotation center 750a has a spring mechanism (not shown) inside, and the shutter mechanism 750 urges the shutter 750 so that the light-shielding piece 750c does not enter the space 740a of the photosensor 740 unless a force is applied from the outside. Has been. When the protruding piece 703 s comes into contact with and presses the protruding piece abutting portion 750 b, the light shielding piece 750 c enters the space 740 a of the photosensor 740. The vicinity of the shutter 750 is protected by attaching a lid member 701 a to the base 701.

  In this embodiment, the photo sensor 740 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece 750c, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the movable object 703 is in the initial position when the photo sensor 740 detects the light shielding piece 750c. When the photo sensor 740 does not detect the light shielding piece 750c, it is determined that the movable object 703 is at a position other than the initial position.

  FIG. 90 is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 91A is an external perspective view of the rendering movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 91 (b) to 91 (d) show the circular portion of FIG. 91 (a) in an enlarged manner. The operation of the protruding piece 703s and the shutter 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91B to 91D. 90 (a) and 91 (b) show a state where the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the projecting piece 703 s contacts the projecting piece abutting part 750 b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the projecting piece abutting part 750 b, so that the light shielding piece 750 c descends to the space 740 a of the photosensor 740. I have entered. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  90 (b) and 91 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703 s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703 c. For this reason, the protruding piece 703 s is detached from the protruding piece contact portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force no longer acts on the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, the protruding piece abutting portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light shielding piece 750c is raised and retracts from the space portion 740a of the photosensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  90 (c) and 91 (d) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by the maximum angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c and comes into contact with the mechanical end and stops. Since the protruding piece 703s is separated from the protruding piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and no pressing force is applied to the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, the protruding piece abutting portion 750b is lowered by the urging force of the spring and maintains the stopped state. At the same time, the light-shielding piece 750c is also lifted to maintain the state of being withdrawn from the space 740a of the photosensor 740. The photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIG. 92 is a rear view and a partial cross-sectional view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 92 (a) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is the same as FIG. 90 (a). FIG. 92 (b) shows a cross section taken along line AA of FIG. 92 (a), and FIG. 92 (c) shows an enlarged cross section of a part of FIG. 92 (b). 92A to 92C show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the projecting piece 703 s contacts the projecting piece abutting part 750 b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the projecting piece abutting part 750 b, so that the light shielding piece 750 c descends to the space 740 a of the photosensor 740. I have entered. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIG. 92 (d) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is the same as FIG. 90 (b). FIG. 92 (e) shows a cross section taken along line BB of FIG. 92 (d), and FIG. 92 (f) shows a cross section in which a part of FIG. 92 (e) is enlarged. FIGS. 92D to 92F show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703 s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703 c. For this reason, the protruding piece 703 s is detached from the protruding piece contact portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force no longer acts on the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, the protruding piece abutting portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light shielding piece 750c is raised and retracts from the space portion 740a of the photosensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  93 to 96 schematically show a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the game board 200 is viewed from the left to the right in the horizontal direction. FIG. 93 (a) shows that the effect movable body 224 as the first means is stopped at the initial position, and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the second means arranged behind the effect movable body 224. It shows a state in which light is emitted from the front toward the front. A photo sensor 740 is disposed on the base 701 of the effect movable body 224. The photosensor 740 has a pair of wall portions arranged to face each other with a space portion 740a formed with a predetermined width in the horizontal front-rear direction. A light emitting element 740c is arranged on the front wall part of the pair of wall parts, and a light receiving element 740d is arranged on the rear wall part 740b. The wall portion 740b on which the light receiving element 740d is disposed functions as a light-impermeable member at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light-impermeable member. The effect movable body 224 is provided with a movable object 703 as a fourth means. Further, since the movable movable body 224 is in the initial position and the movable object 703 is also in the initial position, the light shielding piece 750c of the shutter 750 projects in the vertical direction into the space portion 740a to shield the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c. For this reason, the light receiving element 740d does not detect light exceeding a predetermined threshold intensity.

  The effect movable body 224 relates to the decorative symbol display device 208, an initial position (first position) that does not overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction, and a position that overlaps at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction ( The range including the second position) can be moved.

  In this example, the effect movable body 224 can move along a linear trajectory in the vertical direction. However, the effect movable body 224 moves along a trajectory including a curved line or an arc without being limited to a linear trajectory. It may be possible, and it is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be movable in the left-right direction or the diagonal direction. The effect movable body 224 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), and can emit light at any position. The effect movable body 224 can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, and can emit light while the movable object 703 is moving. May be.

  The photosensor 740 detects whether or not the movable object 703 is in the initial position based on whether or not the light receiving element 740d receives the light from the light emitting element 740c. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c is blocked by the light shielding piece 750c and cannot be received by the light receiving element 740d, and when the movable object 703 is moving, the light from the light emitting element 740c. Can be received by the light receiving element 740d. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, light from the light emitting element 740c can be received by the light receiving element 740d without being blocked by the light shielding piece 750c, and when the movable object 703 is moving, the light emitting element 740c May be blocked by the light-shielding piece 750c so that it cannot be received by the light-receiving element 740d.

  The position of the light shielding piece 750 c of the shutter 750 is changed according to the movement of the movable object 703. In this example, the shutter 750 is provided separately from the movable object 703, but the movable object 703 and the light shielding piece 750c may be provided integrally. Further, the reflectance of at least part or all of the surface of the light shielding piece 750c may be lower than that of at least part or all of the surface of the effect movable body 224 (it is difficult to reflect light).

  The movable object 703 is movable in a range including a third position (initial position) and a fourth position (movement position). In this example, the center portion 703c rotates about the rotation axis, and the fourth position is less overlapped with the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 than the third position. That is, the degree to which the movable object 703 protrudes from the base 701 increases. The movable object 703 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light while the movable object 703 is moving, and can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, The light emission mode may be different between the third position and the fourth position.

  FIG. 93B shows that the effect movable body 224 moves downward as indicated by the arrow from the initial position, and is positioned in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the effect movable body 224. It shows the state. Light is emitted forward from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in the figure. The light emitted from the decorative design display device 208 irradiates the effect movable body 224 located in the front from behind, but the wall portion 740b behind the pair of wall portions of the photosensor 740 is at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b. Functions as a light-impermeable member. In this way, a part of the members constituting the photosensor 740 is located behind the light receiving element 740d as a light impermeable member, thereby preventing the light receiving element 740d from receiving the light from the decorative symbol display device 208. can do.

  94, the movable object 703 rotates around the rotation axis of the central portion 703c from the state of FIG. 93 (b), and the effect movable body 224 is moved more than the position (third position) shown in FIG. 93 (b). The state which moved to the 4th position where the overlapping degree with the base 701 becomes small is shown. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined amount, as described with reference to FIGS. 91B to 91D, the protruding piece contact portion 750b is pressed against the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750. Since the protruding piece 703 s moves, the protruding piece abutting portion 750 b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light shielding piece 750 c is raised and retracted from the space portion 740 a of the photosensor 740. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c is received by the light receiving element 740d.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of an area including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modification of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. In the photo sensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 95A, the light receiving element 740d is disposed on the front wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and the light emitting element 740c is disposed on the rear wall portion 740b. As a result, when the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 including the light-emitting element 740c and the light-shielding piece 750c are positioned behind the light-receiving element 740b. In some cases, light from the symbol display device 208 can be prevented from being received by the light receiving element 740b.

  The photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 95 (b) has a pair of wall portions opposed to each other with a space portion 740a formed with a predetermined width in the vertical direction. A light emitting element 740c is disposed on the lower wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light receiving element 740d is disposed on the upper wall portion 740b. The wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is arranged has a region behind the light receiving element 740b functioning as a light-impermeable member as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light-impermeable member. The light shielding piece 750c moves in the horizontal front-rear direction as the movable object 703 moves from the initial position. By doing so, the wall portion 740b made of a light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 provided with the light receiving element 740d is located behind the light receiving element 740d, so that the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 can be more received by the light receiving element. 740d may be difficult to receive light. In addition, since the direction of the light from the decorative design display device 208 and the direction of the light from the light emitting element 740c are orthogonal, it may be difficult to make the light receiving element 740d receive the light from the decorative design display device 208. is there.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modification of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIGS. 96 (a) to 96 (c) has the same configuration as the effect moveable body 224 shown in FIG. 93, for example, and is a thin plate separate from the photosensor 740 as a third means. It is characterized in that a light opaque member 760 is provided. The light-impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 96A is disposed so as to cover at least the back of the photosensor 740 on the rear side of the base 701. The light-impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 96B is disposed so as to cover at least the rear and lower sides of the photosensor 740 on the rear side and the lower side of the base portion 701. The light-impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 96C is disposed so as to cover at least the rear and upper and lower sides of the photosensor 740 on the rear side and the upper and lower sides of the base 701. By disposing such a light-impermeable member 760 at least behind the photosensor 740, it may be possible to more reliably prevent light from the decorative symbol display device 208 from entering the light receiving element 740d. The light-impermeable member 760 is not limited to a thin plate shape, and may be, for example, a light-shielding film or the like coated on the rear surface of the base 701 at least behind the photosensor 740.

  Next, the rendering operation in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 shows effects in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 97A to 97H show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order almost in time series. 97 (a), (c) to (f), and (h), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 76, the universal display device 210, and the special figure 1 display. The device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the general figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown in an extracted manner. FIG. 97 (b) shows that a game ball passes through the first general-purpose start opening 227. FIG. 97 (g) shows a state in which the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened left and right.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the fourth graphic display area a2 of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. The 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the usual figure holding number display area a5, and the 4th figure display area a6 of the usual figure are arranged. Further, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reserved number display area 801. On the right side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for performing a general graphic effect display or a variable icon display.

  FIG. 97 (a) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 changes the special figure 1 which repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. It shows the state of displaying. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols in which the decorative symbols move from top to bottom is performed (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays, for example, the first off symbol “special figure I” as a stop symbol form. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the usual figure variable game is stopped, and on the usual figure display device 210, for example, the off symbol “common figure C” is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol form. In addition, the fourth symbol display area a6 of the usual figure is displayed to indicate that the usual figure variable game is stopped.

  The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit with three LEDs, indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “3”. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is three. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “3” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1, for example, a character image of “爺” is displayed. The second and third hold displays h2 and h3 are normal hold displays, and for example, a black circle image is displayed.

  In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all LEDs are turned off, and it is shown that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is "0". Also, the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 216 indicates that all LEDs are extinguished and the number of normal-use hold is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 is displayed as a default display without displaying the ordinary drawing effect display and the change icon display. A number “0” indicating the number of reserved common drawings is displayed in the usual figure holding number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows that three game balls have passed through the first general-purpose starting port 227 continuously.

  FIG. 97 (c) shows the first time that three game balls pass through the first general opening 227 as shown in FIG. 97 (b) during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 97 (a). This shows a state in which the usual figure variation game is started. The general-purpose display device 210 performs normal-variable display in which all the seven segments are lit and the central one segment is lit repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the three decorative symbols shown in FIG. 78 (d) are displayed in a variable display in which the decorative symbols of the normal symbol move sequentially from top to bottom (in the drawing). , Indicated by a down arrow). In addition, a display indicating that the usual figure variable game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area a6. The usual figure hold lamp 216 is lit with two LEDs, indicating that the number of usual figure holds is “2”. In addition, a number “2” indicating the number of holds of the usual figure is displayed in the usual figure hold number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 97 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol pattern on the general diagram display device 210 when the general diagram variable game shown in FIG. 97 (c) ends during the special diagram 1 variable game shown in FIG. 97 (a). The off symbol “general map C” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the general symbol decoration 3 (for example, an image representing a cross mark) indicating that the result of the common variable game is out of place during the normal symbol stop period is stopped and displayed. Has been. In addition, the fourth symbol display area a6 of the usual figure is displayed to indicate that the usual figure variable game is stopped.

  FIG. 97 (e) shows a state in which the second ordinary game is started during the special figure 1 game shown in FIG. 97 (a). The general-purpose display device 210 performs normal-variable display in which all the seven segments are lit and the central one segment is lit repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable decorative symbol display in which the normal decorative symbols sequentially move from top to bottom is performed. In addition, a display indicating that the usual figure variable game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area a6. The usual figure hold lamp 216 is lit with one LED, indicating that the number of usual figure holds is “1”. In addition, a number “1” indicating the number of holds of the usual figure is displayed in the usual figure hold number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 97 (f) shows an example of a stop symbol pattern displayed on the general diagram display device 210 when, for example, the general diagram variable game shown in FIG. 97 (e) ends during the special diagram 1 variable game shown in FIG. 97 (a). The winning symbol “general map B” is stopped. Also, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the general symbol decoration 2 (for example, an image representing a double circle) indicating that the result of the common symbol variable game is a hit during the normal symbol stop period is stopped. It is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol display area a6 of the usual figure is displayed to indicate that the usual figure variable game is stopped. In the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and around the special effect area 803, an effect image g1 at the time of normal winning is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (f), when a win-win game is won, as shown in FIG. 97 (g), an electric chew release state in which the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened to the left and right is set.

  FIG. 97 (h) shows an example of an effect produced when the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the open state of the electric chew shown in FIG. 97 (g). In the special effect area 803, a character image of “Tono” indicating that the electric chew is released is displayed, and for example, a tutorial (game table explanation) image g2 “electric choo is open!” Is displayed in a balloon area indicating the voice of the man. Has been. In this way, in this example, a general drawing effect display corresponding to the general variable game as shown in FIG. 97 is performed.

  FIG. 98 shows effects in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 98A to 98H show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order in time series. 98 (a) to 98 (h) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 76, the universal diagram display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 display device. 214, the ordinary figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the fourth graphic display area a2 of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. The 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the usual figure holding number display area a5, and the 4th figure display area a6 of the usual figure are arranged. Further, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reserved number display area 801. On the right side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for performing a general graphic effect display or a variable icon display.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating a disengagement is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays, for example, the first off symbol “special figure I” as a stop symbol form. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the usual figure variable game is stopped, and on the usual figure display device 210, for example, the off symbol “common figure C” is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol form. In addition, in the normal 4th symbol display area a6, a display indicating that the general variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the special effect area 803 is displayed as a default display without displaying the ordinary drawing effect display and the change icon display.

  The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit with three LEDs, indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “3”. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is three. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “3” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 are normal hold displays, for example, a black circle image is displayed. The third hold display h3 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of FIG. 1, and for example, a character image of “爺” is displayed.

  In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all LEDs are turned off, and it is shown that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is "0". Also, the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general-purpose hold lamp 216 indicates that all LEDs are extinguished and the number of normal-use hold is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 is displayed as a default display without displaying the ordinary drawing effect display and the change icon display. A number “0” indicating the number of reserved common drawings is displayed in the usual figure holding number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 98 (b) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 changes the special figure 1 which repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the central one segment. It shows the state of displaying. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols in which the decorative symbols move from top to bottom is performed (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with two LEDs and the special figure 1 hold number is “2”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, two hold indications h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is two. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “2” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803 at the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon is displayed with a black circle image as if the digested hold has moved.

  FIG. 98 (c) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game has elapsed for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, respectively. ing.

  In FIG. 98 (e), the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b has the decorative symbol. This shows a state where the variable display is performed.

  FIG. 98 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7” indicating a disengagement is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 98 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of special figure 1. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 perform variable display of decorative symbols. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit with one LED, and the special figure 1 hold number is “1”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 holding number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one holding display h1 is displayed, and it is indicated that the holding number of the special figure 1 is 1. In addition, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “1” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803, a black circle image is displayed as if the digested suspension has moved.

  FIG. 98 (h) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game has elapsed for a predetermined time. In addition, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the middle and right symbol display areas 208b and 208c are in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 99 shows effects in the special figure 1 variable game. 99 (a) to 99 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. Further, the state shown in FIG. 99 (a) continues from the state shown in FIG. 98 (h).

  In FIG. 99 (a), the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Only the middle symbol display device 208b has the decoration symbol. The normal reach state in which the fluctuation display is performed is shown.

  FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special symbol “J” as the second off symbol as a stop symbol form. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5” indicating a loss is stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 99 (c) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of special figure 1. FIG. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so all the LEDs on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are off and the number of hold in the special figure 1 is “0”. It is shown. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that no hold display is made and the hold number of the special figure 1 is zero. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a change icon is displayed with an image of “爺” as if the digested hold has moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button press indication is displayed with an image imitating the chance button 136 together with the message “Press the button!”. In addition, a button reception period display image indicating a period during which the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 within the remaining time shown in the button reception period display image or when the button reception period elapses, as shown in FIG. Is displayed as a preview image to notify the result. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  In FIG. 99 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b performs variable display of the decoration symbol. Indicates the normal reach state.

  FIG. 99 (f) shows a state where normal reach has been developed to super reach. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as an effect display area. In this example, a super-reach image in which the samurai shouts out loud, “It ’s a game!” Is displayed.

  In FIG. 99 (g), the character “Win” is displayed when the warrior wins the game, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Shows the state.

  FIG. 99 (h) shows “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration” in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, which have been reduced in the upper right corner of the display area, move to the center of the display area to indicate a big hit. “7” indicates an enlarged and stopped display. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. In this way, in this example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure variable game as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 is performed.

  FIG. 100 shows an example of performance in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 100A illustrates a time setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 100B illustrates an effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 100C illustrates a volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 100D illustrates a brightness setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can make various settings for the pachinko machine 100 using the screens shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 100E illustrates a hit display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A large screen at the center of the display area is used as the effect display area, and in this example, a hit display image in which a samurai on a horse is moving on a mountain road is displayed. Around the display area, for example, a special big hit image of the number “7” indicating that the big hit is a special big hit is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, an acquired ball number display image is displayed on the upper side of the display area (in this example, “80 balls” is displayed). In addition, a round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, “1R” is displayed). In the lower right corner, a display image of the number of jackpots (number of consecutive resorts) is displayed (in this example, “number of jackpots: 1” is displayed).

  FIG. 100F illustrates the display screen during power support displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A special symbol variation game is performed in the electric support state, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region. In the electric support state, the player should make a right turn to allow many game balls to pass through the second general figure starting port 229 and to allow the special figure 2 starting port 232 to win many game balls. For this reason, with the variation display of the decorative symbol as a background display, the direction of launching by a clockwise arrow on the character string “Please strike right!” And the enlarged game ball in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 A suggestion is displayed. Note that the special effect area 803 is displayed with a variation icon based on the normally reserved image of FIG. 2, and further, one normal reserved display h4 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved display area.

  FIG. 100G illustrates a demonstration display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string “Dayo” is displayed. FIG. 100H illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a door opening error screen and a pan full error screen are displayed.

  FIG. 101 shows an effect example using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 101A to 101J, the effect movable body 224 is moved from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame defining the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. It shows a state where it is lowered and stopped in the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 101A shows a state in which when the image shown in FIG. 97F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (a), the decorative symbols change display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special At least a part of the normal map stop symbol display in the effect region 803 and the effect image g1 are hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the 4th symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, the 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the general figure reserved number display area a5, The usual 4th symbol display area a6 is not hidden by the effect movable body 224. Special Figure 1 Reservation Number Display Area a1, Special Figure 1 4th Symbol Display Area a2, Special Figure 2 Reservation Number Display Area a3, Special Figure 2 4th Symbol Display Area a4, General Figure Reservation Number Display Area a5, and General The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is not hidden by the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  FIG. 101B shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 97H is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (b), the decorative symbol change display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special The electric chew release display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 are at least partially hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (c) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (c), the decorative display of any of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c is stopped, and the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 or the special figure 2 hold number display area is held. The default display in the special effect area 803 is at least partially hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101D shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99B is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (d), the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c is stopped, the reserved display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area, and the special effect. The default display in the area 803 is made to be at least partially hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (e), the decorative display variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, the button press suggestion display, and the button reception period display image are The effect movable body 224 is at least partially hidden.

  FIG. 101 (f) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (f), at least a part of the decorative display of the left / right / right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the notice image is at least partially. Is hidden.

  FIG. 101 (g) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c reduced in the upper right corner of the display area is prevented from being hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (h) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 100 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (h), at least a part of the winning hit display image and the big hit count display image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special big hit image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (i) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 100 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (i), at least a part of the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c and the display screen during power support are hidden by the effect movable body 224. Yes.

  FIG. 101 (j) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 100 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (j), at least a part of the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c and the dish full tank error screen is hidden by the effect movable body 224. . On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 102 shows an effect example using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 102A to 102J, as shown in FIG. 83, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 82, and the movable object 703 simulating a blade is the base 701. A state in which the central portion is rotated by a maximum angle counterclockwise with the center as the rotation center is shown.

  In FIG. 102A, when the image shown in FIG. 97F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (a), the decorative symbols change display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special The normal-design stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 are at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the 4th symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, the 4th symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the general figure reserved number display area a5, The usual 4th symbol display area a6 is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Special Figure 1 Reservation Number Display Area a1, Special Figure 1 4th Symbol Display Area a2, Special Figure 2 Reservation Number Display Area a3, Special Figure 2 4th Symbol Display Area a4, General Figure Reservation Number Display Area a5, and General The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  FIG. 102 (b) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 97 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (b), the decorative symbol change display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special The electric chew release display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 are at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 102 (c) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 99 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (c), the decorative display of any of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is stopped, and the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 or the special figure 2 hold number display area is held. The default display in the special effect area 803 is at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 102 (d) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 99 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (d), the decorative display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is stopped, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, and special effects. The default display in the area 803 is at least partially hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 102 (e) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 99 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (e), the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, the button press suggestion display, and the button reception period display image are as follows. The base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224 is at least partially hidden.

  In FIG. 102 (f), when the image shown in FIG. 99 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (f), the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the notice image are the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or At least a part of the movable object 703 is hidden.

  In FIG. 102 (g), when the image shown in FIG. 99 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c reduced in the upper right corner of the display area is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  In FIG. 102 (h), when the image shown in FIG. 100 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (h), at least a part of the winning hit display image and the big hit count display image is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special big hit image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 102 (i) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 100 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (i), at least one of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display and the electric support support display screen by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. The part is hidden.

  FIG. 102 (j) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 100 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is used as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (j), the decorative display variation display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c and the dish full tank error screen are at least partially due to the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Is hidden. On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 102 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A game machine (eg, pachinko machine 100) having a plurality of directing means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, the effect movable body 224),
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first rendering means is capable of executing at least a moving operation,
The second rendering means is capable of performing at least a light emission operation,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a photo sensor (for example, photo sensor 740),
At least a part of the photosensor is a light emitting means (for example, a light emitting element 740c),
At least a part of the photosensor is a light receiving means (for example, a light receiving element 740d),
The photo sensor is movable at least along with the moving operation of the first rendering means,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a light shielding means (for example, a wall portion 740b of the photosensor 740),
The light shielding means is movable at least along with the moving operation of the first rendering means,
In the first state, the light shielding means is located between the second rendering means and the light receiving means (for example, behind the light receiving element 740d),
The first state is a state where the position of the first rendering means is the first position,
Said 1st position is a position (for example, position in a display screen front plane) where at least one part of the light which said 2nd production means emits is irradiated toward said 1st production means. ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the light shielding means is located between the photo sensor of the first effect means capable of executing at least the moving operation and the second effect means as the display means, the photo sensor However, there is a case where it is possible to perform a stable performance without improving false detection with the light of the second performance means and to improve the interest of the game.
(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a third effect means (for example, movable object 703),
The first effect means has at least the third effect means,
The third effect means is movable along with the moving operation of the first effect means,
The third rendering means is capable of executing at least a moving operation,
The photosensor is at least changeable to a plurality of sensor states,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit,
In the second state, the photosensor is at least changeable to one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state,
In the third state, the photosensor is at least changeable to the other sensor state of the first sensor state and the second sensor state,
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is a second position,
The third state is a state where the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is not the second position.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the third effect means that moves by the moving action of the first effect means can further execute the moving action, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second effect means is capable of executing at least display (for example, display of decorative symbols and various effects).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100, by hiding the display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the moving operation of the first effect means, and to improve the entertainment of the game in some cases.
(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second rendering means includes a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure hold number display, a general figure hold number display, a special figure fourth symbol, a common figure fourth symbol, Notice display, pre-read notice display, etc.)
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
In the first period, the first presentation means can cover at least a part of the first display (for example, a decorative symbol, a notice display, a pre-read notice display, etc.) from the front,
The first period is at least a part of an operation period of the moving operation of the first rendering means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100, by hiding the first display, the player can be focused on the moving operation of the first effect means, and the interest of the game can be improved.
(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in a movable body.

  In addition, the light shielding plate (for example, the light shielding piece 750c) is provided at least at a position between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and the light reflectance of the light shielding plate is the first reflectance. The first rendering means has at least a second region whose light reflectance is the second reflectance, and the first reflectance is the second reflection. It may be lower than the rate (it is difficult to reflect light).

  In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit is directed to the light receiving unit may be different from the direction in which the light from the second rendering unit is directed forward. In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit is directed to the light receiving unit may be a direction opposite to the direction in which the light from the second rendering unit is directed forward. In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit travels toward the light receiving unit may be a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the light from the second rendering unit travels forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting unit is directed to the light receiving unit may be the same direction as the direction in which the light from the second effect unit is directed forward.

  Further, at least a part of the photosensor may be a light shielding unit. Further, the light shielding means may be provided in the first effect means separately from the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the back of the photosensor. The light shielding means may cover at least the back of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the lower part of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the upper part of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the side of the photosensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear and one or more directions among the front, rear, left, right, top and bottom of the photosensor. The light shielding means may be located at least behind and below the photosensor. In other words, when a photo sensor is mounted on a conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that reflects light always flows down the game area, so the path of light reaching the light receiving part of the photo sensor cannot be specified. However, in some cases, erroneous detection can be prevented by covering the light from the display device and the light from the rolling game ball by covering the back and bottom of the photosensor, respectively. In addition, by not covering more than necessary (covering only two directions, front, rear, left, right, up and down), there are cases where the weight of the first rendering means can be weighed to reduce power during movement and reduce costs. . Further, the light shielding means may be part of a member constituting the photosensor. The light shielding means may be a part of a member provided with the light emitting means. The light shielding means may be a part of a member provided with the light receiving means.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of displays may be a second display. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the moving operation period. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the first rendering means may be capable of hiding at least part of the first display and at least part of the second display from the front.

  Further, the third effect means may be capable of executing the moving operation to a position covering at least a part of the second effect means from the front. Further, the third rendering means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the moving operation period. The third rendering means may be capable of hiding only at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the third rendering means may be capable of hiding at least part of the first display and at least part of the second display from the front.

  Further, the second effect means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display at the same time. Each of the plurality of displays may be a display indicating game information (hereinafter referred to as “display indicating a plurality of game information”). In addition, a display indicating a plurality of game information or a plurality of game information includes a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure hold number display, a general figure hold number display, a special figure fourth pattern, a general figure fourth Symbol, notice display, pre-read notice display, tutorial display, special drawing effect display, general drawing effect display, background display, button press suggestion display, variation display, pseudo variation display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, Out of line display, jackpot effect display, jackpot round number display, count number display for each round, number of acquired balls, jackpot ream number display, probable change effect display, short and medium effect display, launch direction suggestion display, pre-reading mode display Periodic effect display, demonstration screen display, volume setting display, light amount setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting executed periodically (for example, every hour) Shown, error display, may include at least one of. Further, the first display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. Further, the second display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. Further, at least one of the plurality of effect means may be a fourth effect means.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is used as an example of the game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 103, “a plurality of types of reels 1002 which are rotated and driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix 1)
A game stand having a plurality of directing means,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The first rendering means is capable of executing at least a moving operation,
The second rendering means is capable of performing at least a light emission operation,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a photo sensor,
At least a part of the photosensor is a light emitting means,
At least a part of the photosensor is a light receiving means,
The photo sensor is movable at least along with the moving operation of the first rendering means,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a light shielding means,
The light shielding means is movable at least along with the moving operation of the first rendering means,
In the first state, the light shielding means is located between the second rendering means and the light receiving means,
The first state is a state where the position of the first rendering means is the first position,
The first position is a position where at least a part of the light emitted by the second rendering means is irradiated toward the first rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a third presentation means,
The first effect means has at least the third effect means,
The third effect means is movable along with the moving operation of the first effect means,
The third rendering means is capable of executing at least a moving operation,
The photosensor is at least changeable to a plurality of sensor states,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit,
In the second state, the photosensor is at least changeable to one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state,
In the third state, the photosensor is at least changeable to the other sensor state of the first sensor state and the second sensor state,
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is a second position,
The third state is a state where the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is not the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The second rendering means is capable of at least displaying.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,
The second rendering means is capable of executing at least one of a plurality of displays.
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
In the first period, the first rendering means can cover at least a part of the first display from the front,
The first period is at least a part of an operation period of the moving operation of the first rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

<Embodiment D>
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment D of the present invention will be described in detail. In order to avoid redundant description, only the configuration different from the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiments A to B will be described below, and the same or similar configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings. Description is omitted.

<Game board>
First, the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment D of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 105) are disposed around it. Details of the accessory unit 950 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is not necessary to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to display various effects and various game information. Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In addition, a stage 244 is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in an area where the game ball can roll. The stage 244 can temporarily roll a game ball or the like outside the game area 124. Further, a wall 200a3 described later is erected on the rear side of the stage 244, and a game ball that rolls on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall 200a3, and the front side. Guided to the game area 124.

  Although not shown, the game board 200 includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The general map display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general map, and is constituted by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. A first special figure display device 212 and a second special figure display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The not-shown universal chart hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending custom figure variable games (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the normal figure variable game has a predetermined number (for example, 2). It is possible to hold up to 2). The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the figure variation game. The high-probability medium lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a probabilistic state to a high probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

  In addition, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, and a first variable. A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When a prize is won), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the front of the game board 200 One is arranged on the right side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and are arranged at the lower right of the game board 200 as viewed from the front in this embodiment. The first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 include a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. When the display device stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is raised as a winning ball. Drain to dish 126. Note that the balls that have entered the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called windmills and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc. The variable prize opening 235) or the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232) is won, or any prize opening or start opening is not won, or the ordinary start opening 228 It reaches the out port 240 only by passing.

<Household unit>
Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950.

  The accessory unit 950 of the present example is constituted by a falling and unfolding accessory unit 700, a rising accessory unit 750, a launching accessory unit 800, and a V forming accessory unit 850. In this example, the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are configured as one unit.

<Functional unit / Fall-deployed functional unit>
106 to 110 are exploded perspective views of the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the drop-deployment accessory unit 700 mainly includes a U-shaped base 702 in front view, and a pair of left upper and lower drive units disposed on the left side and the front right side of the base 702. 704, a right up / down drive unit 706, a lock release unit 708 disposed on the back side of the base 702, a relay substrate 710 for electrically connecting the dropping and unfolding accessory unit 700 and another substrate, and a pair The left and right driving unit 704 and the right vertical driving unit 706 are configured to be slidable in a vertical direction by a falling and unfolding accessory 712 (see FIG. 108).

<Corporate unit / Falling unit / Left (right) vertical drive>
As shown in FIG. 106, the left vertical drive unit 704 includes a cylindrical drive base 704a fixed to the base 702 with screws, a left drive motor 704b attached to the upper portion of the drive base 704a, and the drive motor 704b. A drive gear 704c fixed to the drive shaft and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting the power of the drive gear 704c are configured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 107, the left vertical drive unit 704 is fitted into the base 702 and is slidable in the vertical direction along the base 702. The left vertical drive unit 704 is fixed to the slider 704e. Of the left rotation motor base 712e1 and a gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

  The gear portion 704g is arranged to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and the gear portion 704g, the accessory support portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated by operating the left drive motor 704b to rotationally drive the gear 704d. And is configured to slide up and down. The right up / down driving unit 706 has the same structure as the left up / down driving unit 704, as shown in FIGS.

  A falling and unfolding combination 712, which will be described later, is supported at both ends by a combination support section 704f of the left vertical drive section 704 and a combination support section 706f of the right vertical drive section 706, and is driven by the left drive motor 704b and the right drive. By operating the motor 706b, it is possible to slide in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the dropping and developing agent 712 in the vertical direction may be referred to as “up and down operation of the dropping and developing agent 712”.

<Corporate unit / drop deploying unit / unlocking unit>
As shown in FIG. 106, the unlocking portion 708 includes a solenoid 708a driven by a drive circuit 516, a shaft portion 708b slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 708a, and a shaft portion engaged with the shaft portion 708b. A movable portion 708c that slides in the vertical direction together with 708b, a rotation portion 708d that rotates in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable portion 708c, and a claw that can slide in the direction indicated by reference symbol A by the rotation portion 708d. And a portion 708e.

  The claw portion 708e of the unlocking portion 708 is slidably disposed inside and outside a through hole 702a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is actuated to cause the claw portion 708e to enter the through hole 702a, the base 702 is prevented from sliding downward (locked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is actuated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the downward sliding of the base 702 is allowed (unlocked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight. To do. In addition, in the above-described “up and down movement of the falling and unfolding combination 712”, in addition to the downward sliding due to the operation of the left driving motor 704b and the right driving motor 706b, the downward sliding due to the weight of the falling unfolding combination 712 is also performed. included.

<Corporate unit / Fall unfolding accessory unit / Fall unfolding accessory>
108. As shown in FIG. 108, the falling and unfolding accessory 712 includes a long plate-like fourth structure 712a supported at both ends by the accessory support portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 107, and the fourth structure 712a. A first plate-like first structure 712b that is rotatably attached to the front side of the first structure, a pair of left and right third structures 712c that are rotatably arranged on the fourth structure 712a, A pair of left and right second structures 712d rotatably disposed on the structure 712b, a left rotation drive unit 712e for rotating the left side of the first structure 712b in front view, A right rotation drive unit 712f for rotationally driving the right side of the structure 712b when viewed from the front, and plate-like cover means 718 (see FIG. 109) disposed on the front side of the first structure 712b. Configured.

  The left rotation drive unit 712e decorates the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the accessory support unit 704f shown in FIG. 19, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. Left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3, a gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and the gear 712e4 are rotatable and fixed to the left side surface of the first structure 712b in front view. Rotating arm 712e5.

  The right rotation drive unit 712f has substantially the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e and is as shown in FIG. 108. However, the rotation arm 712f5 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51 and the position of the detection piece 712f51 is determined. The point provided with the sensor 712f6 which can be detected is different from the left rotation drive part 712e. The right rotation drive unit 712f includes the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6, thereby detecting whether or not the first structure 712b is located at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 111 (a)). Is possible.

  In the falling and unfolding accessory 712, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2, the rotation arm 712e5 is rotated via the gear 712e4, and the left side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712e5 is fixed is the front side. It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712f2, the rotation arm 712f5 is rotated via the gear 712f4, and the right side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712f5 is fixed is rotated (inclined) to the front side. ) Is configured to.

  Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 at the same time, the first structure 712b can be rotated (tilted) to the front side (direction away from the fourth structure 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (inclining) the first structure 712b of the dropping and developing agent 712 to the front side may be referred to as “the rotating operation of the dropping and developing agent 712”.

  A base portion 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b, and a gear 712h and an arm portion 712k having external teeth meshing with the gear 712h are rotatably disposed on the base portion 712g. Is done. On the other hand, an engagement portion 712m that can engage with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

  When the first structure 712b returns to the initial position shown in FIG. 111 (a), the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side is engaged with the engagement portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side. By engaging, the first structure 712b is held at the initial position. On the other hand, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side, the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the engagement portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side is performed. Canceled.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 that can slide up and down with respect to the first structure 712b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and is urged downward by a spring 722. When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side is disengaged from the slider 721, the slider urged by the spring 722 721 is configured to push the cover means 718 downward. The cover means 718 in this example has a character face, but other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name) and the like may be applied.

  Returning to FIG. 108, the base portion 712g is provided with a magnet 712n for attracting the iron metal piece 712c7 provided in the pair of third structures 712c by a magnetic force. When 712b is inclined about 180 ° toward the front, the pair of third structures 712c are held by the base portion 712g by the magnetic force.

  In addition, a pair of magnets 712b1 are disposed at both ends of the first structure 712b, and the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 correspond to the pair of magnets 712b1. The metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 made of iron are disposed at the positions where they are placed. As a result, the first structure 712b that has returned to the initial position is configured to be attracted to the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and the initial position is maintained.

  In addition, the third structure 712c on the left side in front view has a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface on the left side in front view of the fourth structure body 712a, and is rotatable to the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 is disposed, the upper left body portion 712c4 is fixed to the arm portion 712c3, and the cap portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 are fixed to the upper left body portion 712c4.

  In addition, the third structure 712c on the right side when viewed from the front is supported by a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface of the fourth structure 712a on the right side when viewed from the front, and is rotatable with respect to the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 to be disposed, the upper right body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, the hat portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 fixed to the upper right body portion 712c4 are configured.

  In addition, the second structure 712d on the left side when viewed from the front is supported by a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b on the left side when viewed from the front, and is rotatable with respect to the support portion 712d1 via a support shaft 712d2. The arm portion 712d3 is provided, the lower left half body portion 712d4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. The

  As shown in FIG. 109, the second structure 712d on the right side in the front view includes a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the right side in the front view of the first structure 712b, and the support portion 712d1 via the support shaft 712d2. An arm portion 712d3 that is rotatably arranged, a lower right body portion 712b4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. It is configured.

  In the falling and unfolding accessory 712, the upper left half 712c4, the hat 712c5, and the school emblem 712c6 included in the third structure 712c on the left side when viewed from the front, and the upper right half 712c4 included in the third structure 712c on the right side when viewed from the front. , The hat portion 712c5, the school badge portion 712c6, the left lower body portion 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the left side when viewed from the front, and the lower right body portion 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the right side when viewed from the front. A character is formed.

<Light-emitting means of an accessory unit / falling-expanding accessory unit / falling-expanding accessory>
110 (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the first structure 712b extracted, and FIG. 110 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the fourth structure 712a. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure 712a.

  A light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting units 714a (LEDs in this example) is attached to the front side of the first structure 712b, and by the plurality of second light emitting units 714a, It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through cover means 718 disposed in front. A light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (in this example, LEDs) is attached to the back side of the fourth structure 712a, and the plurality of first light emitting means 716a. Thus, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a disposed in front.

  As shown in FIG. 110, a first harness to which a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a and the first sub-control unit 400 can be connected to the light emitting substrate 716 of the fourth structure 712a. The connector CN1, the second connector CN2 to which a harness for electrically connecting the light emitting board 714 of the fourth structure 712a and the first structure 712b can be connected, the fourth structure 712a and the left A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotation motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a to the right rotation motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected. A fourth connector CN4 is provided.

<Operation of falling unfolding agent>
Next, operation | movement of the fall expansion | deployment combination 712 is demonstrated using FIGS. 111-115. As described above, the falling and unfolding accessory 712 can be moved up and down to slide in the up-and-down direction and rotate to rotate the first structure 712b forward.

<Dropping and unfolding action / vertical movement>
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the up and down movement of the dropping and unfolding combination 712 by extracting only the dropping and unfolding combination unit 700, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the expansion | deployment combination 712.

  111 (a) and 112 (a) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up-and-down operation. The initial position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the whole of the falling and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900 above the game board 200.

  In this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the character's face) applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is visible from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. The center effect 900 and the falling and unfolding feature 712 provide an integrated performance. The initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (does not overlap) the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device from the front. All 208 display areas are visible.

  111 (b) and 112 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is located at an intermediate position in the up-and-down operation. When the falling unfolding accessory 712 is positioned at the initial position in the up-and-down operation, when the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 106) is operated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), and the falling and unfolding accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight and reaches the intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and unfolding combination 712 at the initial position descends and a part of the dropping and unfolding combination 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center combination 900. In this intermediate position, a part of the decoration applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the drop-deployment accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display is displayed from the front. Although the upper part of the display area of the device 208 becomes invisible, most of the display area is visible.

  FIG. 111 (c) and FIG. 112 (c) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the falling and unfolding accessory 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the up and down movement. The maximum movement position in the up-and-down operation is a position where the dropping and developing agent 712 at the intermediate position further descends, and a part of the dropping and developing agent 712 does not overlap the center agent 900 (do not overlap). Further, the maximum movement position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the falling and unfolding accessory 712, and is decorative from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

<Operation / Rotation operation of falling unfolding agent>
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the rotation operation of the falling and unfolding combination 712 by extracting only the falling and unfolding combination unit 700, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are the dropping and unfolding combination unit installed in the game board 200. FIG. 7 is a view showing a rotation operation of a drop unfolding accessory 712 in 700.

  113 (a) and 114 (a) are front views showing a case where the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 45 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b Two left and right third structures 712c that rotate in directions close to each other as fulcrums and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d approach each other using the fourth structure 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

  Further, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 109) is released, the slider 721 pushes the cover means 718 downward. For this reason, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined about 45 ° toward the front, but the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 113 (b) and 114 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 90 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 45 ° to 90 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are converted into the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the direction closer to each other than the state rotated by 45 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two right and left second structures 712d are the first The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 45 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 90 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is not visible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  Since the cover means 718 is structured to slide downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, the cover means 718 is in a state where the cover means 718 is inclined about 90 ° toward the front. Even if it exists, the protrusion amount to the front side of the cover means 718 can be suppressed to the minimum. As a result, it is possible to avoid the gaming board 200 from becoming unnecessarily thick, and to avoid the situation where the cover means 718 comes into contact with other members.

  FIGS. 113 (c) and 115 (a) are front views when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 135 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 90 ° to 135 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced with the first structure 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c that rotate in the directions closer to each other than the state rotated by 90 ° toward the near side and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the direction than the state where the structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 135 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 113 (d) and 115 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the dropping and unfolding accessory 712 is rotated 180 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b is rotated from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are replaced by the first structure 712b. The two third left and right third interlocked with the rotation of the two second structures 712d on the left and right sides are brought into contact with each other by rotating in directions closer to each other than the state rotated 135 ° toward the front side. The structures 712c are brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the first structure 712b than in a state in which the first structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the near side.

  In addition, the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c are also in contact with each other, and the character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two right and left third structures 712c. Is done. Note that the cover means 718 is inclined by about 180 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the bar means 718 is not visible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (the book) disposed on the fourth structure 712a. In the example, part of the LED) is also covered by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c, and thus cannot be viewed from the front.

<Various substrates>
Next, various substrates provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Various substrates / control boards, drive boards>
FIG. 116 (a) is a circuit block diagram showing main control circuits around the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 of this example includes a sub-control board 245a and a motor drive board 245b electrically connected to the sub-control board 245a by a board-to-board (hereinafter referred to as “BtoB”) connector. , Is composed of. Note that the connection between the sub-control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b is not limited to a connection using a BtoB connector, and may be a connection using a harness or the like.

  The basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 described with reference to FIG. 42 are mounted on the sub-control board 245a. In this example, the basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 are each configured by a one-chip microcomputer. Can communicate with each other.

  Although details will be described later, the motor drive board 245b is mounted with electrical components that electrically connect the sub-control board 245a to another board, and the motor drive board 245b is a drive mounted on the sub-control board 245a. Input of effect control data from the circuit 516 and output of a drive signal (for example, a board LED PWM signal described later) for operating a motor or the like that is a drive source of the game board-side movable body 444 (for example, an accessory unit 950). Is possible.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of two types of boards, a sub-control board 245a on which at least one microcomputer is mounted, and a motor drive board 245b on which no microcomputer is mounted. When there is a change in the specifications of the game board-side movable body (for example, the accessory unit 950), there is a case where only one motor drive board 245b can be replaced to cope with the change in the specifications, and the other sub-control board 245a By providing versatility, it may be possible to shorten the development period and reduce costs.

  The basic circuit 402 of the sub-control board 245a includes a game table frame lamp 542, a game board lamp 532, a speaker 120, and a game frame side movable body 442 (for example, glass using a front frame door (glass frame)). Button, shielding device (shutter), etc.), second sub-control unit 500, motor drive board 245b, etc. are connected. The motor drive board 245b is connected to a sub-control board 246a, a harness for electrically connecting the motor drive board 245b to another board, and the like.

<Various boards / connections and locations>
Next, connection relations and arrangement locations of various substrates included in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 116 (b) is a block diagram schematically showing the connection relationship of various substrates included in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. In this example, a board peripheral board 672 mounted with electrical components including a switching circuit is electrically connected to a motor drive board 245b electrically connected to the sub-control board 245a (FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 120). (Refer to FIG. 120A and FIG. 121A) and electrically connect the peripheral board 674 on which no electrical component is mounted to the board peripheral board 672 (see FIGS. 120A and 121A). An on-object lighting board 676 on which electrical components including power LEDs are mounted is electrically connected to the board 674 (see FIG. 121A).

  FIG. 117 (a) is a view of the game board 200 as viewed from the back, and is a view for explaining the arrangement locations of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b. In this example, a sub-control board case 245 is provided on the back surface of the game board 200, and the sub-control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b are accommodated in the inner space of the sub-control board case 245. 117A is a liquid crystal control board constituting the second sub-control unit 500, and a board indicated by reference numeral 678 in FIG. 117A is supplied from the power supply control unit 660. It is a sub power supply board that can supply the power to the sub control units such as the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 117 (b) is a view of a part of the game board 200 extracted from the front, and is a view for explaining the placement location of the board peripheral board 672. In this example, the board peripheral board 672 is disposed in the vicinity of the stage 244 of the game board 200, and is electrically connected to the motor drive board 245b shown in FIG. 117 (a) via a board peripheral board connection harness 678 described later. Has been.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a view seen from the front through a part of the game board 200, and is a view for explaining an arrangement place of the accessory peripheral board 674. FIG. In this example, the accessory peripheral board 674 is arranged on the upper left of the game board 200 in front view, and is electrically connected to the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 117 (b) via a harness (not shown).

  FIG. 118 (b) is a front view showing a part of the dropped and unfolded accessory unit 700 extracted, and is a diagram for explaining the arrangement place of the accessory-mounted illumination board 676. FIG. The on-workpiece illumination board 676 of this example is a board that constitutes a part of the drop-deployment-workpiece unit 700, and corresponds to the light-emitting board 716 described with reference to FIG. The accessory lighting board 676 (light emitting board 716) is electrically connected to the accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 118A via a harness (not shown), and the first light emission composed of the power LED. Means 676a (716a) are provided.

<Motor control board>
Next, the motor control board 245b will be described. 119 (a) and 119 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a connection relationship between the motor drive board 245b and another board and an example of electrical components mounted on the motor drive board 245b.

  The motor drive board 245b includes a BtoB connector 245b1 that can be connected to the BtoB connector 245a1 of the sub-control board 245b, and a connector 245b2 that can be connected to the connector 678a of the board peripheral board connection harness 678 connected to the board peripheral board 672. .

  The BtoB connector 245b1 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1-No. 80 of 80 pins. The 31 pin is connected to the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal output from the drive circuit 516 mounted on the sub-control board 245a. The connector 245b2 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 119 (b), the B.B connector 245b1 No. No. 31 pin and connector 245b2 No. Between the 26 pins, a first resistor 245b3, an IC 245b4, and a second resistor 245b5 are arranged in series as electrical components.

<Board peripheral board>
Next, the board peripheral board 672 will be described. 120A to 120C are diagrams showing an example of the connection relationship between the board surface peripheral board 672 and another board and an electrical component mounted on the board surface peripheral board 672. FIG.

  The board peripheral board 672 includes a motor drive board side connector 672a that can be connected to the connector 678b of the board peripheral board connection harness 678, and an accessory peripheral board side that can be connected to a harness connector (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674. And a connector 672b.

  The motor drive board side connector 672a is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678. Further, the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to a signal line of a board surface LEDPWM signal of a harness (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 121 (b), the No. 26 pins and No. of the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b. Between the 26 pins, a first resistor 672c, a second resistor 672d, a switching circuit 672e made of an N-channel MOS FET, and a third resistor 672f are disposed as electrical components.

  The first resistor 672c is an operation stabilization resistor for the switching circuit 672e. The second resistor 672d is a ground resistor for setting the voltage between the gate and the source of the switching circuit 672e to 0v when the input signal of the switching circuit 672e is opened. The third resistor 672f is a current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, a power LED) mounted on the accessory-mounted illumination board 676.

  No. of the motor drive board side connector 672a. When an ON signal composed of a predetermined voltage (a voltage that is larger than the gate threshold voltage of the switching circuit 672e and allows a sufficient drain current to flow, 5v in this example) is applied to the 26-pin LED PWM signal, switching is performed. The circuit 672e is turned from OFF to ON, and the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is turned on.

  In this example, since the MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit, the switching speed of turning on / off the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is higher than when other switching elements are applied. In addition to being able to increase the speed, there are cases where heat dissipation can be improved.

  In this example, an N-channel MOS FET is used as the switching circuit 672e. However, for example, a P-channel MOS FET may be used, or another switching element such as a transistor may be used.

  Further, the third resistor 672f is applied as the current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) mounted on the accessory lighting board 676, as shown in FIG. 120 (c). In addition, two third resistors 672f and a fourth resistor 672g connected in series may be applied as the current setting resistors.

<Peripheral board>
Next, the accessory peripheral substrate 674 and the accessory lighting substrate 676 will be described. FIG. 121A is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory lighting board 676 and another board, and FIG. 121B is mounted on the accessory lighting board 676. It is the figure which showed an example of an electrical component.

  The accessory peripheral board 674 can be connected to a board peripheral board side connector 674a that can be connected to a harness connector (not shown) connected to the board peripheral board 672, and a harness 680 connector connected to the accessory lighting board 676. And an accessory lighting board side connector 674b.

  The board surface peripheral board side connector 674a is No. 1-No. 30 of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to a signal line of a board surface LEDPWM signal of a harness (not shown) connected to the board surface peripheral board 672. In addition, the accessory lighting board side connector 674b is No. 1-No. 22 of 22 pins. No. 17 pin is the No. of the illumination board 676 on the work. It is connected to electrical components mounted on the accessory-side lighting board 676 via 17 pins.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 121 (b), the No. Between the 17 pins and the power supply (7v power supply in this example), a first resistor 676b and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) are disposed as electrical components. Yes.

  In this example, a plurality of resistors (in this example, a first resistor 245b3 and a second resistor) arranged in series between the sub-control board 245a and the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, a power LED). The brightness of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) is set by setting the total resistance value of 245b5 and the first resistor 676b) to 15 ohms and the current passing through the first resistor 676b to about 270 milliamps. (Light intensity) is increased.

<Lighting board on the part>
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a circuit configuration of the on-object lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 122 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the accessory-mounted illumination board 676.

  A plurality of LEDs 1 to LED 14 and an LED driver IC 3 that controls the light emission of these LEDs 1 to LED 14 are mounted on the on-workpiece illumination board 676 of this example. LEDs 1 to 14 are full-color LEDs in which LED elements of three primary colors of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are incorporated.

<Lighting board on the work / LED>
The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) incorporated in each of the LED1 to LED3 are connected in series with separate signal lines L1 to L3, respectively, and the anode of each LED element The side is connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT2 of the LED driver IC3. The first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L1 connecting the red (R) LED elements incorporated in the LEDs 1 to 3. A resistor R6 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  Thus, in this example, while no resistance is provided for the signal lines L2 and L3 to which the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected, the green (G) and blue (B) LEDs are not provided. The resistor R6 is disposed only on the signal line L1 to which the red (R) LED element having a voltage drop higher than that of the element is connected, thereby suppressing the heat generation of the LED driver IC3.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) incorporated in each of the LEDs 4 to 6 are connected in series by separate signal lines L4 to L6, respectively, and the anode of each LED element The side is connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT3 to XOUT5 of the LED driver IC3. Further, a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is provided between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L4 connecting the red (R) LED elements incorporated in the LED4 to LED6. A resistor R7 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) built in the LED 7 and LED 8 are connected in series with separate signal lines L7 to L9, respectively, and the anode side of each LED element is A power source of a first voltage (7v in this example) is connected, and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT6 to XOUT8 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, a second resistance value (270 ohms in this example) is provided between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L7 connecting the red (R) LED elements incorporated in the LED7 and LED8. A resistor R10 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  As described above, in this example, the voltage supplied to the LED is varied depending on the number of LEDs connected in series with the signal line, so that an appropriate voltage corresponding to the number of LEDs is supplied. doing.

  In this example, the power of the second voltage (12v) is supplied from a power supply board (not shown) to the sub-control board 245a, and then passes through the motor drive board 245b, the panel peripheral board 672, and the accessory peripheral board 674. Then, it is supplied to the accessory lighting board 676. In addition, after the power source of the first voltage (7v) is generated in the sub-control board 245a, it passes through the motor drive board 245b, the panel surface peripheral board 672, and the accessory peripheral board 674 to the accessory lighting board 676. Supplied. Further, after the power source of the third voltage (5v) is generated in the sub-control board 245a, it passes through the motor drive board 245b, the panel surface peripheral board 672, and the accessory peripheral board 674, and the on-function lighting board 676 ( LED driver IC3 etc.).

  In this example, the resistance of the red (R) LED element connected to the signal line is varied depending on the number of red (R) LED elements connected to the signal line. Between the signal lines having different numbers, the voltage drop values due to the red (R) LED elements are made uniform.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) incorporated in each of the LEDs 9 to 11 are connected in series by separate signal lines L10 to L12, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements The side is connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT9 to XOUT11 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, the first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L10 connecting the red (R) LED elements incorporated in the LEDs 9 to 11. A resistor R8 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) incorporated in each of the LEDs 12 to 14 are connected in series by separate signal lines L13 to L15, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements The side is connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT12 to XOUT14 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is provided between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L13 that connects the red (R) LED elements incorporated in the LEDs 12 to 14. A resistor R9 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  Thus, in this example, the signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15 that connect three full-color LEDs in series are connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v). Thus, the signal lines L7 to L9 that connect the two full-color LEDs in series are connected to the first voltage (7v) so that an appropriate voltage corresponding to the number of LEDs is supplied. .

<Lighting board on work / LED driver>
The LED driver IC3 includes a serial clock input terminal SCLK, a serial data input terminal SDA, an external resistor connection terminal REXT for setting a constant current output, and constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23. The constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels) incorporate a fixed frequency PWM controller having a 7-bit resolution (128 steps) and a constant current driver in order to set the LED to a prescribed luminance. Further, the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels) are fixed by one resistor (in this example, the resistor R5 having a resistance value of 2.2 k ohm) connected to the external resistor connection terminal REXT for setting the constant current output. It is possible to adjust the value of the current flowing through the current driver.

  The LED driver IC3 inputs 8-bit serial data via the serial clock input terminal SCLK and the serial data input terminal SDA, thereby selecting the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels) individually. The connected LEDs can be individually controlled using different light emission data, or the connected LEDs can be collectively controlled using the same light emission data by selecting all channels simultaneously.

  That is, the LED driver IC3 includes a first LED (for example, LED1 to LED3) connected to a first signal line (for example, signal lines L1 to L3) and a second signal line (for example, signal lines L7 to L7). By transmitting the same light emission data to the second LED (for example, LED7, LED8) connected to L9), the way of lighting of the first LED and the way of lighting of the second LED become the same way of lighting. Can be controlled.

<Variation 1 of the lighting board on the accessory>
Next, a first modification of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 123 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a first modification of the circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 122, the signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15 that connect three full-color LEDs in series are used as the power source of the second voltage (12v). While connecting, the example which connected the signal lines L7-L9 which connect two full color LED in series to the 1st voltage (7v) was shown.

  In this example, signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 that connect three full-color LEDs in series, and signal lines L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 that connect two full-color LEDs in series are connected to the second voltage. The signal lines L7 to L9 connected to the (12v) power source and connecting only one full-color LED are connected to the first voltage (7v).

  Among the signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 that connect three full-color LEDs in series, the cathode side of the signal lines L1 and L13 that connect the red (R) LED elements is connected to the LED driver IC3. In the meantime, resistors R6 and R9 having a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) are connected in series with a red (R) LED element, respectively.

  Among the signal lines L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 that connect two full-color LEDs in series, the cathode side of the signal lines L4 and L10 that connect the red (R) LED element is connected to the LED driver IC3. Between them, resistors R7 and R8 having a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) are connected in series with the red (R) LED element, respectively.

  Among the signal lines L7 to L9 that connect only one full-color LED, a fourth resistor is connected between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L7 that connects the red (R) LED element. A resistor R10 of value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  In other words, in this example, the resistance value of the resistor provided on the signal line is made different depending on the voltage of the supplied power supply and the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line. The voltage drop value due to the red (R) LED element is uniform between the voltage and the signal line in which the number of connected red (R) LED elements is different.

<Modification 2 of the lighting board on the accessory>
Next, a second modification of the on-object lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 124 is a circuit configuration diagram illustrating a second modification of the circuit configuration of the accessory-mounted illumination board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 122, the signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15 that connect three full-color LEDs in series are used as the power source of the second voltage (12v). While connecting, the example which connected the signal lines L7-L9 which connect two full color LED in series to the power supply of a 1st voltage (7v) was shown.

  In this example, signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 that connect three full-color LEDs in series are connected to a power supply of a second voltage (12v), and signal lines that connect two full-color LEDs in series. L4 to L6, L10 to L12 are connected to the power source of the first voltage (7v), and signal lines L7 to L9 that connect only one full color LED are connected to the power source of the third voltage (5v). ing.

  That is, in this example, the configuration is such that an appropriate voltage corresponding to the number of LEDs is supplied by varying the voltage of the power source connected to the signal line according to the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line. doing.

<Modification 3 of the lighting board on the part>
Next, Modification Example 3 of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 125 is a circuit configuration diagram showing Modification Example 3 of the circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 122, the signal line to which the green (G) or blue (B) LED element is connected is not provided with a resistor, but the green (G) or blue (B) LED. An example is shown in which a resistor is provided only on a signal line to which a red (R) LED element having a higher voltage drop is connected.

  In this example, in addition to the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected, the resistor is also arranged on the signal line to which the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected. ing.

  Of the signal lines L1 to L3 that connect three full-color LEDs in series, the first side of the signal line L1 that connects the red (R) LED element is connected to the LED driver IC3 between the first and the LED driver IC3. A resistor R6 having a resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L2 connecting the green (G) LED element. The resistor R having the first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element is connected to the signal line L3. A resistor R having a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with a blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the cathode side.

  Among the signal lines L4 to L6 that connect two full-color LEDs in series, the third side between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L4 that connects the red (R) LED element A resistor R7 having a resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L5 connecting the green (G) LED element. Between the resistor R having the third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) in series with the green (G) LED element and the blue (B) LED element. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with a blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED driver IC 3.

  Among the signal lines L7 to L9 that connect only one full-color LED, a fourth resistor is connected between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L7 that connects the red (R) LED element. A resistor R10 having a value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L8 connecting the green (G) LED element. In the meantime, a resistor R having a fourth resistance value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the cathode of the signal line L9 connecting the blue (B) LED element. On the side, a resistor R having a fourth resistance value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED driver IC 3.

  That is, in this example, signal lines L1 to L3 that connect three full-color LEDs in series, signal lines L4 to L6 that connect two full-color LEDs in series, and a signal that connects only one full-color LED. In lines L7 to L9, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected and the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the green (G) LED element is connected. And the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the blue (B) LED element is connected is set to the same resistance value.

  Among the signal lines L10 to L12 that connect two full-color LEDs in series, the third side between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L10 that connects the red (R) LED element. A resistor R8 having a resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L11 connecting the green (G) LED element. The resistor R having the fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element is connected to the signal line L12. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED driver IC 3.

  That is, in this example, in the signal lines L10 to L12 that connect two full-color LEDs in series, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected, and green (G) While the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the blue (B) LED element is connected is set to a different resistance value, the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the green (G) LED element is connected And the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the blue (B) LED element is connected are set to the same resistance value.

  Among the signal lines L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series, the signal line L13 that connects the red (R) LED element is connected to the LED driver IC3 on the cathode side. A resistor R9 having a resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L14 connecting the green (G) LED element. The resistor R having a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element is connected to the signal line L15. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED driver IC 3.

  That is, in this example, in the signal lines L13 to L15 that connect three full-color LEDs in series, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected, and green (G) The resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the LED element is connected is different from the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the blue (B) LED element is connected.

  In this example, regarding the resistance values of the resistors arranged on the signal lines to which the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) LED elements are connected, (1) all the same resistance values are used. , (2) In the case where all have different resistance values, (3) In the case where any one of them has a different resistance value, three cases have been described. Any one of these (1) to (3) One, a plurality, or all may be applied to the game machine.

<Modification 4 of the illumination board on the work>
Next, a modification 4 of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 126 is a circuit configuration diagram illustrating a fourth modification of the circuit configuration of the accessory-mounted illumination board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 122, the No. An example is shown in which the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged on the signal line L16 that connects the 17 pins and the power supply (7v power supply).

  In this example, the first light emission is achieved by connecting the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) to the signal line L16 that connects the LED driver IC3 and the power source of the second voltage (7v). The LED driver IC3 controls the light emission of the means 676a (power LED).

  That is, in this example, the signal lines L7 to L9 that connect two full-color LEDs in series and the signal line L16 in which one first light emitting means 676a (power LED) is arranged are connected to the LED driver IC3 and the first one. It is connected in parallel with the power supply of the second voltage (7v).

<Other variations of the lighting board on the part>
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, another modified example of the on-object lighting board 676 will be described.

  FIG. 127 (a) is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example in which the supply voltage is different for each LED element constituting the full color LED. In this example, among the three types of LED elements constituting the full color LED, the red (R) LED element is connected to the power source of the first voltage (7v), and the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements. Is connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v).

  That is, in this example, it is configured to supply an appropriate voltage according to the characteristics of the LED element by varying the voltage to be supplied according to the type of the LED element constituting the full color LED.

  FIG. 127B is a circuit configuration diagram illustrating an example in which the supply voltage and the LED driver are different for each LED element constituting the full color LED. In this example, among the three types of LED elements constituting a full-color LED, a red (R) LED element is connected to a first voltage (7v) power source and a first LED driver (driver 1), and green ( G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected to a second voltage (12v) power source and a second LED driver (driver 2). The first LED driver (driver 1) and the second LED driver (driver 2) may be electronic components mounted on the same substrate, or electronic components mounted on different substrates. There may be.

  That is, in this example, by supplying different voltages and LED drivers according to the types of LED elements constituting the full-color LED, it is possible to supply appropriate voltages according to the characteristics of the LED elements, and to appropriately emit light. It is configured to perform control.

  In this example, the supply voltage and the LED driver are different for each LED element, but the supply voltage and the LED driver may be different for each LED instead of each LED element. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), of the three types of LED elements constituting the first full-color LED, only the red (R) LED element is connected to the power supply of the third voltage (5v). The other green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v), and all of the three types of LED elements constituting the second full-color LED are connected to the second voltage. It may be connected to the power source of (12v), and among the three types of LED elements constituting the second full-color LED, only the red (R) LED element may be connected to the LED driver via a resistor.

<Example of LED arrangement on the lighting board on the accessory>
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, an arrangement example of LEDs on the on-object lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 110 described above, and is a diagram for explaining an arrangement example of the LEDs on the accessory lighting board 676.

  In this example, the three full-color LEDs 1 to LED3 connected in series in FIG. 122 are arranged in the first substrate area AR1 in the upper left of the light emitting substrate 716 when viewed from the front. The first board area AR1 is the board area closest to the first connector CN1 and the third connector CN3 in the light emitting board 716. In addition, the three full-color LEDs 4 to 6 connected in series in FIG. 122 are arranged in the second substrate area AR2 at the lower left of the light emitting substrate 716 when viewed from the front. The second board area AR2 is the board area closest to the second connector CN2 in the light emitting board 716.

  Since the three full-color LEDs 1 to LED3 and LED4 to LED6 connected in series may have lower brightness than the two full-color LEDs 7 and LED8 connected in series, they should be placed in the board area near the connector. Thus, there are cases where it is possible to avoid a situation where the connector is conspicuous due to the light emission of the LED and the aesthetic appearance of the decorative body is impaired.

  Further, in this example, the three full-color LEDs 9 to LED11 connected in series in FIG. 122 are arranged in the fourth substrate area AR4 at the upper right of the light emitting substrate 716 when viewed from the front. The fourth board area AR4 is a board area closest to the fourth connector CN4 in the light emitting board 716.

  The three full-color LEDs 9 to 11 connected in series may have lower brightness than the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 connected in series. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the connector is conspicuous due to light emission and the aesthetic appearance of the decorative body is impaired.

  In this example, the two full-color LEDs 7 and LED8 connected in series in FIG. 122 are arranged in the third substrate area AR3 at the center of the light emitting substrate 716 when viewed from the front. The third substrate region AR3 is a substrate region farthest from the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in the light emitting substrate 716, and is the substrate closest to the first light emitting means 676a (716a) made of a power LED. It is an area.

  With such a configuration, the synergistic effect of the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 and the power LED can increase the brightness near the center of the outer edge of the decorative body, thereby improving the effect.

  In this example, the LED driver IC3 in FIG. 122 is disposed between the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 in the third substrate region AR3, and another full-color LED is replaced with an LED driver on the light-emitting substrate 716. The IC3 is uniformly arranged around the periphery. With such a configuration, the luminance of the LEDs on the light-emitting substrate 716 can be made uniform, and the effect can be improved.

  In addition, the arrangement | positioning location of LED in the illumination board 676 on an accessory is not limited to this example, For example, two full-color LED7, LED8 connected in series in the said FIG. 122 is 1st, 2nd, 4th, You may arrange | position in any of 5th board | substrate area | region AR1, AR2, AR4, AR5. Further, in order to make the light emission of the power LED stand out, one of the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 is arranged side by side on the right side of the LEDs 4 to 6, and the other LED 8 is arranged on the left side of the LEDs 12 to 14. They may be arranged side by side.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present example has an LED (for example, full color LEDs 1 to 14 shown in FIG. 122) and a driver for controlling the light emission of the LED (for example, FIG. 122, and a board provided with a plurality of signal lines (for example, an on-object lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 122), of the plurality of signal lines. One is a first signal line (for example, signal lines L7 to L9 shown in FIG. 122), and one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line (for example, shown in FIG. 122). Signal lines L1 to L3, or L4 to L6, or L10 to L12, or L13 to L15), and the first signal line is connected in series with the LEDs having the first number (for example, two). Signal line The second signal line is a signal line in which the LEDs having a second number (for example, three) are connected in series, and the first signal line is a signal connected to the driver. The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, the first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage (for example, 7v) is supplied, and The second signal line is a signal line to which a second voltage (for example, 12v) is supplied, and the second number is larger in the first number and the second number (for example, The game machine is characterized in that the second voltage is higher (for example, 7v <12v) between the first voltage and the second voltage.

  According to the gaming machine according to this example, an appropriate voltage corresponding to the number of LEDs can be supplied, and a plurality of LEDs can be efficiently illuminated. Further, there are cases where different lighting methods can be used depending on the location of the LED, and a game table having a feature on the board can be provided.

  In addition, the structure which performs light emission control of LED using a 3rd voltage may be sufficient. Further, the first voltage, the second voltage, or the third voltage may be any of 5v, 7v, and 12V, or may be any other voltage. Moreover, the structure which does not use a driver may be sufficient.

  The driver includes the LED connected to the first signal line (hereinafter referred to as “first LED”) and the LED connected to the second signal line (hereinafter referred to as “second LED”). It may be a driver that controls the light emission of the first LED and the light emission of the second LED by transmitting the same light emission data to the “LED”).

  With such a configuration, even when the number of LEDs connected by the signal line and the supplied voltage are different, the same light emission data can be transmitted in the same way, In some cases, the control can be simplified. In this example, it is possible to make the same way of illuminating with the function of the driver (IC), but with this configuration, a different way of shining (how to shine with different brightness depending on the LED) is used without using this function. There may be. Here, the difference in the way of lighting is applied even at a level that cannot be visually confirmed.

  The substrate is a substrate provided with a power LED (for example, the first light emitting means 676a shown in FIG. 122), and the power LED is a switching circuit (for example, the switching circuit 672e shown in 121 (b)). The one of the plurality of signal lines is a third signal line (for example, the signal line L16 shown in FIG. 122), and the third signal line is the power of the LED. One LED is connected to the signal line, the third signal line is a signal line not connected to the driver, and the third signal line is the first voltage and the second voltage. It may be a signal line to which one of the voltages (for example, 7v) is supplied.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to control the LED without increasing signal lines with different voltages more than necessary. For example, as shown in FIG. 126, the third signal line may be connected to the driver. Moreover, the structure which performs light emission control similar to power LED, without connecting a part of LED to a driver may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the movable means for production | generation (for example, the fall expansion | deployment actor 712 shown in FIG. 108) may be provided, and the said board | substrate for light-emitting the said movable means for production may be sufficient.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the light emission control of the effect moving means can be efficiently performed. The effect moving means is not limited to the structure in which the effect moving means is movable by control, but may include means that can be moved by the player's operation. For example, the effect moving means may be provided at a position where the player can operate. It may also include a production operation means. Further, the LED may not be an LED of the movable means for production, and can be applied to, for example, an LED fixed to the frame of the game table, a monitor LED on the back side of the game table, or the like.

  Further, the substrate according to the present invention does not have to be a substrate that moves together with the effect moving means. For example, when the effect moving means moves, the substrate is also applicable to a state in which the positional relationship with the substrate can emit light. The Moreover, even if it is a signal line connected to the same driver, the structure which light-emits different means in a game stand may be sufficient, for example, one is a movable means for production, and the other is fixed in the vicinity. It may be a decoration means.

  The LED is a full-color LED, and the full-color LED is an LED composed of LED elements of three primary colors (for example, red (R), green (G), and blue (B)). The element is an LED element connected to a separate connection terminal of the driver, and in the first signal line and the second signal line, a resistor (for example, FIG. 122) is provided only between the full-color LED and the driver. The resistors R6 to R9) shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the voltage applied to the driver can be lowered by arranging the resistor for the LED element having a color with a small voltage drop. The configuration may be such that resistors are provided on all signal lines to which the three primary color LED elements are connected, or a configuration in which resistors are not provided on all signal lines, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the performance of the driver. is there.

  The first LED and the second LED may be the same type of LED. With such a configuration, there are cases where the light emission control by the driver can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to this example is a gaming table including an LED, a driver that controls light emission of the LED, and a board on which a plurality of signal lines are provided. One of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, and the first signal line is The LED having the first number (hereinafter referred to as “first LED”) is a signal line connected in series, and the second signal line is the LED having the second number (hereinafter, referred to as “first LED”). "Second LED") is a signal line connected in series, the first signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and the second signal line is connected to the driver. The first LED and the second LED are the same type of LED. The first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage is supplied, and the second signal line is a signal line to which the first voltage is supplied, and the first number and The second number is a different number, and even if the same light emission data is transmitted to the first LED and the second LED, the way the first LED shines and the second LED It may be a gaming machine characterized in that the way of lighting is different.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, there is a case where a difference in the way of lighting can be shown as an effect. Moreover, even when there is little light emission data, there are cases where variations can be increased due to differences in the way of light. In some cases, the circuit configuration can be simplified by using the same voltage to be supplied to the first and second signal lines.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to this example is a gaming table including an LED, a driver that controls light emission of the LED, and a board on which a plurality of signal lines are provided. One of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, and the first signal line is The LED is a signal line connected, the second signal line is a signal line to which the LED is connected, the first signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, the first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage is supplied, and the second signal line is a second signal line A signal line to which a voltage is supplied, and in the first voltage and the second voltage, the second voltage is In addition, the LED connected to the first signal line (hereinafter referred to as “third LED”) and the LED connected to the second signal line (hereinafter referred to as “fourth LED”). ), Even if the same light emission data is transmitted, the gaming table may be characterized in that the way the third LED shines and the way the fourth LED shines.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, there is a case where a difference in the way of lighting can be shown as an effect. Moreover, even when there is little light emission data, there are cases where variations can be increased due to differences in the way of light. Further, there is a case where optimal light emission control for the LED can be performed by differentiating the voltages supplied to the first and second signal lines. .

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to this example is a gaming table including an LED, a driver that controls light emission of the LED, and a board on which a plurality of signal lines are provided. One of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, and the first signal line is The LED is a signal line connected, the second signal line is a signal line to which the LED is connected, the first signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and between the LED connected to the first signal line (hereinafter referred to as “fifth LED”) and the driver. A first resistor is provided, and the LED (hereinafter referred to as the LED) connected to the second signal line is provided. , "Sixth LED") and the driver, a second resistor is provided, and the resistance value of the first resistor and the resistance value of the second resistor are different resistance values. Even if the same light emission data is transmitted to the fifth LED and the sixth LED, the way the fifth LED shines and the sixth LED shines differently. It may be a game stand.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, there is a case where a difference in the way of lighting can be shown as an effect. Moreover, even when there is little light emission data, there are cases where variations can be increased due to differences in the way of light. Further, there is a case where light emission control optimum for the LED can be performed by making the resistance values of the resistors connected to the first and second signal lines different.

<Substrate of movable body 1>
Next, the substrate of the movable body 1 will be described. FIG. 129 is a schematic exploded perspective view illustrating a part of members constituting the movable body 1.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 56, the movable body 1 is a deformable movable object unit whose outer shape is deformed, and includes the base portion 10, the movable portions 11, 12, and 14, and the structure body 16. The movable portions 11, 12, and 14 are configured to be displaceable with respect to the base portion 10.

  The movable portion 11 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 11a, a substrate 11c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “second substrate 11c”), a lens member 11e, and a cover body 11f. Is formed. A plurality of light emitting elements 11d (LEDs in this example) are mounted on the substrate 11c in the longitudinal direction. The lens member 11e covers the substrate 11c, and the cover body 11f covers the lens member 11e.

  The movable portion 12 has a shape that is symmetrical to the movable portion 11 and is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and may be referred to as a base portion 12a and a substrate 12c (hereinafter referred to as “third substrate 12c”). The lens member 12e and the cover body 12f are laminated. A plurality of light emitting elements 12d (LEDs in this example) are mounted on the substrate 12c in the longitudinal direction. The lens member 12e covers the substrate 12c, and the cover body 12f covers the lens member 12e.

  The movable portion 14 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 14a, a substrate 14e (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “first substrate 14e”), a lens member 14g, and a cover body 14h. Is formed. The substrate 14e is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 14a, and the lens member 14g has a left and right two-member configuration, and each member covers the substrate 14e. The cover body 14h is fixed to the front side of the base portion 14a and covers the lower portion of the base portion 14a and the lens member 14g. A plurality of light emitting elements 14f (in this example, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 14e in the longitudinal direction.

  The structure 16 includes a front base body 16A, a substrate 16B, a lens member 16C, and a cover body 16D. A plurality of light emitting elements 16b (LEDs in this example) are mounted on the substrate 16B. The plurality of light emitting elements 16b are arranged in a plane, and the structure 16 can emit light as a whole. The lens member 16C covers the substrate 16B, and the cover body 16D covers the lens member 16C. The cover body 16D can be provided with a decorative shape, pattern, or color. In this example, the cover body 16D has an eyeball shape.

<Substrate of movable body 1 / first substrate>
Next, the first substrate 14e will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a front view showing the surface of the first substrate 14e, and FIG. 130B is a rear view showing the back surface of the first substrate 14e.

  A 1st board | substrate is a double-sided board comprised by the surface (surface of the side covered by the cover body 14h) and the back surface (surface of the side which is not covered by the cover body 14h). The front surface shown in FIG. 130A has a mounting area OA in which almost all areas can be mounted with electronic components and the like, while the back surface shown in FIG. 130B is a mounting area provided in the center. It is divided into OA and non-mounting areas NOA (black areas in FIG. 130 (b)) provided on the left and right sides of the mounting area OA.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), on the surface of the first substrate 14e, eight full-color LEDs 1 to 8 as light-emitting elements 14f are spaced at substantially equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the first substrate 14e. Signal line patterns and vias that electrically connect the eight full-color LEDs 1 to 8 and various electrical components (such as the LED driver IC1) mounted on the back surface of the first substrate 14e. Is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (b), an LED driver for controlling the light emission of the full-color LEDs 1 to LED8 mounted on the front surface of the first substrate 14e is provided in the mounting area OA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e. IC1 and various electrical components (resistors, capacitors, etc.) are mounted, signal line patterns connecting the driver IC1 and various electrical components, and various electrical components mounted on the surface of the driver IC1 and the first substrate 14e. Patterns such as signal lines for connecting (eight full-color LEDs 1 to LED8, etc.), vias, and a ground region connected to the ground are formed.

  The non-mounting area NOA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is an area where only a resist is formed without a pattern, a ground, and a copper foil. In this example, the non-mounting area NOA is provided on both the left and right sides of the mounting area OA. Yes. The non-mounting area NOA is formed with a plurality of through holes 14g used for positioning when the first substrate 14e is fixed to the cover body 14h.

<Circuit configuration of movable substrate 1 / first substrate>
Next, the circuit configuration of the first substrate 14e will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the first substrate 14e.

  A plurality of LEDs 1 to LED 8 and an LED driver IC 1 that controls light emission of these LEDs 1 to LED 8 are mounted on the first substrate 14 e of this example. LEDs 1 to 8 are full-color LEDs in which LED elements of three primary colors of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are incorporated. Although not shown, the circuit configurations of the second substrate 11c (the substrate 11c of the movable portion 11) and the third substrate 12c (the substrate 12c of the movable portion 12) are the same as those of the first substrate 14e. It is.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) incorporated in each of the LEDs 1 to 8 are connected to different signal lines L1 to L24, respectively, and the anode side of each LED element is the first side. One LED (5v in this example) is connected to the power source, and the cathode side of each LED element is individually connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 of the LED driver IC1. In this example, the resistor is not provided between the LED element and the LED driver IC1, but a resistor may be provided.

  Since the LED driver IC1 is the same LED driver as the LED driver IC3 described with reference to FIG. 122, the description is omitted. In this example, the external resistor connection terminal REXT for setting the constant current output of the LED driver IC1 is provided. Unused.

<Substrate of movable body 1 / Relationship between first substrate and movable parts 11 and 12>
Next, the relationship between the first substrate 14e and the movable parts 11 and 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a rear view of the movement of the movable parts 11 and 12 as viewed from the rear of the movable body 11.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows the initial positions of the movable parts 11, 12, and 14, and FIG. 132 (d) shows the position (moving position) after the movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are moved. FIGS. 132B and 132C show intermediate positions 1 and 2 between the initial position and the moving position, respectively. The movable parts 11, 12 and 14 can be deformed from the initial position to the moving position via the intermediate position 1 and the intermediate position 2, and can be returned from the moving position to the initial position via the intermediate position 2 and the intermediate position 1. .

  As shown in FIGS. 132 (a) to (d), the mounting area OA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is located behind the mounting area OA when the movable parts 11 and 12 are operated (first (When viewed from the back of the substrate 14e), it is a region that does not overlap the movable parts 11 and 12 (a region that does not overlap).

  On the other hand, when the movable parts 11 and 12 are operated, the non-mounting area NOA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is located behind the non-mounting area NOA (in the rear view of the first board 14e). , 12 may overlap with a part of 12 (area that may overlap).

<Variation 1 of non-mounting area>
Next, Modification 1 of the non-mounting area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining a first modification of the non-mounting area.

  The gaming table according to the present example includes a first decorative body 602 fixedly arranged at the lower right of the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative body that can move in the horizontal direction below the decorative symbol display device 208. 604. In this example, the first decorative body 602 is a decorative body having a shape imitating a rabbit and a stump, and the second decorative body 604 is an ornamental body having a shape imitating a turtle.

  The second decorative body 604 is configured to be capable of reciprocating at least between a first position shown in FIG. 133A and a second position shown in FIG. The first position is a position where the second decorative body 604 does not overlap (do not overlap) the first decorative body 602, and the second position is a part of the second decorative body 604 is the first position. This is a position that overlaps (overlaps) a part of the decorative body 602.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (a black area in FIG. 133 (c)) is disposed on the back surface of the second decorative body 604. ing. The non-mounting area NOA of the second decorative body 604 is an area where only a resist is formed without a pattern, a ground, and a copper foil. In this example, as shown in FIG. When the second decorative body 604 moves to the second position, it may overlap with a part of the first decorative body 604 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in the rear view of the second decorative body 604). It is a certain area (area that may overlap).

  That is, in this example, the non-mounting area NOA is provided in the second decorative body 604 that is a movable object, but the non-mounting area NOA is not provided in the first decorative body 602 that is a fixed object. . Note that the second decorative body 604 may be composed of a single substrate or a plurality of substrates. Further, the non-mounting area NOA may be configured by a plurality of substrates.

<Modification 2 of non-mounting area>
Next, Modification 2 of the non-mounting area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining a second modification of the non-mounting area.

  The gaming table according to the present example includes a third decorative body 612 fixedly disposed at the lower right of the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a fourth decorative body capable of moving in the horizontal direction below the decorative symbol display device 208. 614. In the present example, the third decorative body 612 is a decorative body having a shape resembling an octopus, and the fourth decorative body 614 is a decorative body having a shape resembling an octopus.

  The fourth decorative body 614 is configured to be able to reciprocate at least between a first position shown in FIG. 134 (a) and a second position shown in FIG. 134 (b). The first position is a position where the fourth decorative body 614 does not overlap (does not overlap) the third decorative body 612, and the second position is a part of the fourth decorative body 614 is the third position. It is a position that overlaps (overlaps) a part of the decorative body 612.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (a black area in FIG. 134 (c)) is disposed on the back surface of the fourth decorative body 614. ing. The non-mounting area NOA of the fourth decorative body 614 is an area where only a resist is formed without a pattern, a ground, and a copper foil. In this example, as shown in FIG. 134 (d), When the fourth decorative body 614 moves to the second position, it may overlap with a part of the third decorative body 614 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in the rear view of the fourth decorative body 614). It is a certain area (area that may overlap).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 134 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (a black area in FIG. 134 (c)) is also arranged on the back surface of the third decorative body 612. It is installed. The non-mounting area NOA of the third decorative body 612 is an area where only a resist is formed without a pattern, a ground, and a copper foil. In this example, as shown in FIG. 134 (d), When the fourth decorative body 614 moves to the second position, it may overlap with a part of the fourth decorative body 612 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in the rear view of the third decorative body 612). It is a certain area (area that may overlap).

  That is, in this example, the non-mounting area NOA is provided in both the fourth decorative body 614 that is a movable object and the third decorative body 612 that is a fixed object. Note that the third decorative body 612 or the fourth decorative body 614 may be composed of a single substrate or a plurality of substrates. Further, each non-mounting area NOA may be constituted by a plurality of substrates.

<Movable body 3>
Next, the substrate of the movable body 3 will be described. 135 is a circuit configuration diagram of the substrate of the display device 34 constituting the movable body 3, and FIG. 136A is a front view of the substrate of the display device 34 constituting the movable body 3.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), on the surface of the substrate of the display device 34, a light emitting element L11 disposed at a position serving as a rotation center of the display device 34, and a plurality of light emitting elements disposed radially from the rotation center. Columns LA1 to LA6. In this example, the number of light emitting element rows LA is 6, and they are arranged at an equal pitch in the circumferential direction.

  In this example, the light emitting element L11 disposed at the center is configured by one full color LED 32 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC5. The first light-emitting element array LA1 among the plurality of light-emitting element arrays LA includes a total of 10 LED1 to LED2 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC2 and LEDs 9 to LED16 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC3. It is composed of individual full color LEDs.

  The second light emitting element array LA2 among the plurality of light emitting element arrays LA includes a total of 11 LEDs 11 to LED5 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC2 and LEDs 17 to LED24 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC4. It is composed of individual full color LEDs. The third light emitting element array LA3 among the plurality of light emitting element arrays LA includes a total of 10 LEDs 25 to LED31 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC5 and LEDs 59 to LED61 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC9. It is composed of individual full color LEDs.

  The fourth light emitting element array LA4 among the plurality of light emitting element arrays LA includes a total of 11 LEDs 33 to LED40 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC6 and LEDs 62 to LED64 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC9. It is composed of individual full color LEDs. The fifth light-emitting element array LA5 among the plurality of light-emitting element arrays LA includes a total of 10 LEDs 41 to LED48 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC7 and LEDs 57 and LEDs 58 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC9. It is composed of individual full color LEDs.

  In addition, the sixth light emitting element array LA6 among the plurality of light emitting element arrays LA includes 11 LEDs 49 to LED56 whose emission is controlled by the LED driver IC8 and LEDs 6 to LED8 whose emission is controlled by the LED driver IC2. It is composed of individual full color LEDs.

  FIG. 136 (b) is a rear view of the substrate of the display device 34 constituting the movable body 3. As shown in FIG. 6B, the LED drivers IC2 to IC9 and the latch circuit IC1 shown in FIG. 135 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate of the display device 34 at an equal pitch in the circumferential direction of the display device 34. As described above, by arranging the electronic components at equal pitches in the circumferential direction, when the display device 34 is rotated, the load applied to the slip ring 620 can be reduced, and the life of the display device 34 can be extended. There are cases where it is possible.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to this example is a gaming machine provided with movable means (for example, movable body 1 shown in FIG. 132) capable of executing the first operation. The movable means is a means provided with a first substrate (for example, the first substrate 14e shown in FIG. 132), and one surface of the first substrate has a first region (for example, 132, a non-mounting area NOA shown in Fig. 132. A pattern, ground, copper foil is not provided, and only a resist is formed) and a second area (for example, a mounting area OA shown in Fig. 132). The first region is associated with a certain means (for example, the movable portion 11 shown in FIG. 132) behind the first region in connection with the first operation performed by the movable means. , 12) overlap, and the second region is the first region In the first region and the second region, the area of the pattern line formed in the first region is the pattern line formed in the second region. It is a game stand characterized by being smaller than the area.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, even if the first board and a certain means are in contact with each other due to vibration or the like, the pattern of the first board may be prevented from being damaged, and the movable board may be movable. It is possible to provide a game stand having features in the means.

  In the first region and the second region, the first region may be wider than the second region.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the pattern of the first substrate from being damaged by intensively arranging the pattern of the first substrate in the second region. Note that the second region may be wider than the first region.

  The first substrate is a substrate provided with LEDs (for example, LED1 to LED8 shown in FIG. 130 (a)), and the LED is the other surface of the first substrate, and The LED is disposed at least in a region opposite to the first region, and the LED is connected by a pattern line on the other surface of the first substrate through a via formed in the second region. May be.

  The LED may be disposed on the other surface of the first substrate and on the opposite side of the second region.

  With such a configuration, the light emission range by the LED can be expanded, and the effect can be improved. In addition, the structure by which LED is provided also in the back side of the board | substrate of a game stand may be sufficient.

  Further, a driver (for example, an LED driver IC1 shown in FIG. 130B) that controls light emission of the LED may be provided, and the driver may be provided in the second region.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the driver inconspicuous by providing the driver on the back side of the board (side not visible to the player). The driver may be provided in the first region. In this case, if the movable unit and the first substrate come into contact with each other, the light emission of the LED may be affected. There is. In addition, the driver may be provided on the other surface side, which is effective when there is no space behind the movable means. In some cases, the driver can be arranged using the distance from the LED to the lens (decoration means).

  The pattern line may be formed only in the first region. Further, some pattern lines may be formed in the first region. In this case, for example, any one of the pattern lines of the plurality of LEDs is formed in the first region, and the movable unit When the first substrate comes into contact with the first substrate, it may be possible to find a malfunction due to an abnormal light emission of the LED related to the pattern line.

  Further, the ground in the first substrate may be formed only in the first region. In addition, a part of the ground may be formed in the first region, or all the first regions may be configured as the ground. In this case, if the ground area is sufficient, the malfunction may occur. In some cases, the impact is small.

  The first substrate is a substrate provided with LEDs, and the movable means is means provided with first decoration means (for example, a cover body 14h shown in FIG. 129) on the front side of the LEDs. In addition, at least a part of the area behind the first area may not be covered with the first decoration means.

  With such a configuration, the space in the front and rear direction of the movable means may be reduced. The first area may be covered with the decoration means.

  Further, the movable means is a means constituted by a plurality of movable bodies, and one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, the movable portion 14 shown in FIG. 129), One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, the movable section 11 or the movable section 12 shown in FIG. 129), and the first substrate is formed on the first movable body. A substrate provided, the certain means being the second movable body, wherein the second movable body is associated with the first operation of the movable means. It may be a movable body that overlaps behind the movable body.

  Further, the game area is provided with second decoration means (for example, the first decoration body 602 shown in FIG. 133 or the third decoration body 612 shown in FIG. 134). It is a decoration means, and the second decoration means may be a means that overlaps behind the first area in connection with the first operation performed by the movable means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the pattern and the ground can be protected when interference between the first substrate and other means occurs.

  The first region may be in a state where all of the copper foil is grounded. The first substrate may be a multilayer substrate having three or more layers. Further, the light emission control of the LED may not use a driver, and may be configured to emit light using a switching circuit such as an FET. The driver may be serial communication or parallel communication. Further, the LED may be a power LED or another LED in addition to the full color LED. Moreover, the structure which suppresses heat_generation | fever of a driver by providing resistance between a driver and LED may be sufficient.

  Further, the movable means can be applied to a movable body other than the movable body 1, and may be a movable body arranged in the frame of the game table in addition to the movable body arranged in the game board. Further, the “first operation” of the movable means is not limited to the rotation of the movable means, and includes other operations such as reciprocation, vibration, expansion / contraction, opening / closing, and attachment / detachment from the game table.

<Substrate via>
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a via of a certain board provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 shows a part of a certain substrate extracted.

  Plating treatment is applied to the outer edge portion 630a of the decoration means 630 (for example, the movable portions 11, 12, and 14 of the movable body 1 shown in FIG. 132) provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the plating process refers to a process of depositing a thin metal film such as gold, silver, nickel, or chromium on the surface of the decoration means 630. For example, electroplating such as zinc plating or copper plating, nickel plating, or the like. Electroless plating, chemical conversion treatment, and other surface treatments are applicable.

  The double-sided board provided in the decoration means 630 has a plurality of vias 632 for electrically connecting the front surface and the back surface of the board in the vicinity of the outer edge 630a of the decoration means 630. The via 632 is configured to be connected to the ground on the surface of the double-sided board and not connected to a pattern such as a signal line on the back side of the double-sided board. Note that a method for forming the via 632 is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known plating through-hole method, a conductive paste filling method, or the like can be applied.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs 634 are disposed on the back surface of the double-sided substrate at a position farther from the outer edge portion 630 a than the via 632. Note that the vias of this example can be applied to various illumination boards (boards equipped with LEDs) in a game machine, and can also be applied to other types of boards.

<Variation of substrate via>
Next, a modified example of the via of the substrate will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating a part of the substrate on which the vias of the modified example are formed.

  The decoration means 640 shown in FIG. 138 (a) is made of a circular member, and the outer edge portion 640a is plated over the entire circumference. In addition, a plurality of vias 642 are formed on the double-sided substrate of the decoration means 640 at an equal pitch so as to follow the shape of the outer edge portion 640a. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs 644 are disposed on the double-sided board at a position farther from the outer edge portion 640a than the via 642.

  The decorative means 650 shown in FIG. 138 (b) is made of a rectangular member, and a plating processing portion 650b subjected to plating processing is formed on a part of the outer edge portion 650a. In addition, a plurality of vias 652 are formed on the double-sided substrate of the decoration means 650 at an equal pitch inside the plating portion 650b. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs 654 are disposed on the double-sided board at a position farther from the outer edge portion 650a than the via 652. The via 652 of this example is formed in an L shape in plan view at one corner of the full color LED 654.

  The decorative means 660 shown in FIG. 138 (c) is made of a rectangular member, and the outer edge portion 660a is plated over the entire circumference. In addition, a plurality of vias 662 are formed on the double-sided substrate of the decoration means 600 at equal pitches along the outer edge portion 660a inside the two outer edge portions 660a facing each other. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs 664 are disposed on the double-sided board at a position farther from the outer edge portion 660a than the via 662.

<Other static electricity countermeasures>
Next, another static electricity countermeasure applied to the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the movement of a certain accessory (decoration means) in time series.

  An accessory (decoration means) 670 according to this example includes a disk-shaped rotating body 672 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor (not shown), a metal light-shielding piece 674 attached to the outer edge of the rotating body 672, and The photo sensor (not shown) capable of detecting the passage of the light shielding piece 674 and an illumination board (not shown) provided on the back surface of the rotating body 672 are configured.

  In this example, in order to reliably detect the passage of the metal light shielding piece 674 by the photosensor, the interval between the light emitting element and the light receiving element constituting the photosensor is narrowed. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be generated between the light shielding piece 674 and the photosensor, but in this example, the ground line from the illumination board is connected to the light shielding piece 674 so that the light shielding piece 674 accumulates. The static electricity is released to the lighting board side.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present example has decoration means (for example, the movable parts 11, 12, 14, etc. of the movable body 1 shown in FIG. 132) provided in the gaming area. ) And a substrate (for example, the substrate 630 shown in FIG. 137), wherein the decoration means is plated at least partially (for example, electroplating such as galvanization or copper plating, nickel plating) And the substrate is a substrate provided with electronic components, the substrate is a substrate on which vias that are not connected to pattern lines are formed, and the vias are A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of gaming machines are formed in a certain direction.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, there is a case where static electricity accumulated in a gaming machine or a game medium (such as a game ball or a game medal) can be absorbed by using a via, and a gaming machine having a board characteristic is provided. it can.

  The via may be formed at a position closer to the decoration means than the electronic component. With such a configuration, there is a case where malfunction of the electronic component can be prevented by absorbing the static electricity accumulated in the decoration means with the via.

  Moreover, the said plating may be given to the outer edge of the said decoration means. With such a configuration, there is a case where static electricity accumulated on a game table, a game medium (such as a game ball or a game medal) can be efficiently absorbed.

  The via may be formed along an outer edge of the decoration means. With such a configuration, there is a case where static electricity accumulated on a game table, a game medium (such as a game ball or a game medal) can be efficiently absorbed.

  The vias may be formed at an equal pitch in the certain direction. With such a configuration, there is a case where static electricity accumulated on a game table, a game medium (such as a game ball or a game medal) can be efficiently absorbed.

  The via may be formed in the vicinity of the plated portion in the decoration means. With such a configuration, there is a case where static electricity accumulated in the plated portion can be absorbed by the via.

  The via may be connected to the ground. With such a configuration, there is a case where static electricity accumulated on a game table or a game medium (game ball, game medal, etc.) can be released to the ground.

  The electronic component may be an LED. With such a configuration, there is a case where the malfunction of the LED can be prevented by absorbing the static electricity accumulated in the game table, game medium (game ball, game medal, etc.) by the via.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine for giving an electronic prize or a medalless slot machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, the contents described in one or a plurality of configurations among the plurality of configurations described in each example of the above embodiment are applied to other configurations or described in different examples of the above embodiment. By combining multiple configurations, there are cases where the range of games can be further expanded.

<Embodiment E>
Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming table that allows a player to earn profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 100 through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be locked and openable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 143) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 Chance button lamp 138 that causes the production button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 141 is provided with a lower pan full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 141, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  142 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 141 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 144) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are displayed. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 144) that performs control processing related to the presentation, and processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 144) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 144) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 144) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a sphere, and a power supply control section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines (see FIG. 144). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. The board case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 143 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). 142), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 142 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 142 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening may be any as long as the game ball can be won by passing or entering the game ball, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 to enter the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 141, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 143 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), etc. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, using FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 145 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 1. FIG. In FIG. 145 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 145 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 145 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 145 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 145 (b), six types of special charts "Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f" are shown, and five types of special charts are jackpot symbols ("Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f"). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 145 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 145 (d) shows an example of the usual stop pattern. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 145 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  144 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 146 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after reset start by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 144 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. 144. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 144 are composed of 1 byte. Strobe information (indicating that the data is set when turned on), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 145 (c)) or the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 145 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 145 (a) is turned on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main process in the main control unit shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 149 (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 148, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 149 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 149 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 149 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 149 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 149 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 149 (b), “Special Figure f” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 149 (b), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 149 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 149 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 150 for the success / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 150 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination high probability table, and FIG. 150 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination low probability table. In the case of determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if it is in the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, the special determination low probability state shown in FIG. In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 150C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 150C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. 151A is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 151B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 (b), based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 152A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 152A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 152B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 152C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 152 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 153 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 153 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 153 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 153 (c) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 154, there are a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (a), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 154 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 154 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 154 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 154 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 in FIG. 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 154 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 154 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 154 (d), the moving animation continues. In FIG. 154 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, in FIG. 154 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 where the decorative symbol variation display has started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 154 (h), the valid period is reduced. In FIG. 154 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P, as shown in FIG. 154 (j). . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 154 (k), the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol variation display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 154 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed in FIG. 154 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be the advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 154 in stages.

  In FIG. 155 (p) continuing from FIG. 154 (o), the duel scene animation continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 155 (s). In FIG. 155 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 155 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols determined to be 15R probability variation big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown to FIG. 155 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 155 (v), the background is not displayed, but a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 155 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is made along with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached in a different decorative pattern (a combination of symbols having a 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, and a 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 154 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 155 (t). In 155 (u ′), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 155 (v ′) following FIG. 155 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 155 (w ′) following FIG. 155 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a “big hit” character is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 155 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 156 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 154 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 156 (b). In FIG. 156 (b), the main character, Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 156 (c), as in FIG. 155 (t), all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 156 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (e), the fourth symbol (round shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. Here, FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 157 (b) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas. From the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of FIG. 2 is further displayed. Therefore, the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of displayable notice icons and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  One notice icon may be displayed for one area in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a hat notice icon I6 consisting of a hat symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, a thousand carton box is displayed. A warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes made of symbols is displayed, a fan warning icon I10 made of a fan symbol is displayed in the warning icon third display area YA3, and a warning icon fourth display area YA4 A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed. In the notice icon fifth display area YA5, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 157 (b). It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are digested at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (c), for example. To be controlled. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display (the variation) shown in FIG. 157 (a), the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the change icon display area 280, and the decorative symbol change display (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 (the hold icon h12 moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 157 (a)) moves toward the change icon display region 280. When the decorative symbol change display (symbol change corresponding to the hold 2) is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the hat notice icon I6 is digested, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested thousand box notice icon I9 may be executed. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed since all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan warning icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan warning icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 157 (d). It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding variation) shown in FIG. 157 (a) is started, a Tonari-like effect that increases the notice icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. In this Tono-sama effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 starts, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a DJ effect is performed to increase the notice icon. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing the notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box to the notice icon display area 285 and displaying it is performed. Then, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the Tono-sama effect is executed, The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is out of place may be one, and the number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), the notice icons include those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are not clear, and those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are clear as shown in FIG. 158 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the notice icon for the first shrine icon I1 and the notice icon for the second shrine icon I2 are shown in FIG. 158 (a). And a third icon notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the lord in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. Further, the second icon of the notice of the lord I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the lord in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third icon-notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the person in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of weak to strong. When the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, and the third lord's notice icon I3 are at a predetermined change display timing (for example, an increase display timing of the notice icon), FIG. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 158 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 158 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing the symbol that is the object of prefetching. May be displayed before the screen, and may function as a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed along with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. In the case where the second noun notice icon I2 and the third noun notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, the notice icon (change notice icon) with obvious contents of the corresponding effects includes a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, and a ribbon as shown in FIG. 158 (b). There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the watchmaster, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, there is a case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once. Here, the pseudo-continuous effects include a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gusset pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous effect, for example, as will be described later, when a pseudo-continuous effect starts, a long-length character appears, but the display mode of the long-length character is different from normal (for example, the long-length character is aura). In this case, the reliability is strong. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, the third pseudo-continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. Further, the pseudo-pattern effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing long-length character in the normal display mode. In addition, the pseudo-seam effect of the gaze pattern is an effect of performing a disappointing display as if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, as will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is strong, “Continue” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continue” in black letters with “continue” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the Oniwaban (Ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect in which the notice effect being executed is switched to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is notified in advance. Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is strong, “A freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, “Changing” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon simulating a ribbon worn by the Princess Chibi character, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the prefetch mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, there may be an effect of changing the displayed background from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (low stage change). Production). Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, “STECHEN” is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Also, if the reliability is weak, “STECHEN” may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Note that when the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, either the strong stage change effect or the weak stage change effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousand box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating the thousand box thrown by Tono-sama's character toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, strong or weak. If one thousand box notice icon I9 is digested and the jackpot reliability is strong, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is achieved. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notification, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (notification promotion). Production). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box, if the big hit is confirmed, “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, if the reliability is strong, the “A” pattern may be displayed as “elevated” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Further, if the reliability is weak, “elevated” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice that informs in advance that the jackpot is confirmed, or the premier reach where the jackpot is confirmed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach deviation is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). In the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the fan warning icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan notice icon I10 is consumed, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the content to produce produces changes with the timing when the fan notification icon I10 is digested, the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon simulating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest indication of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, shuriken notice icon I7, ribbon The notice icon I8, the carousel notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the digest display, and a corresponding effect may be executed. Or, there is a case where any notice icon is deleted without being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change described above is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed via the notice icon. It is also possible to display to delete the notice icon (the notice icon “none” shown in item 5 in FIG. 158 (b): erase effect). In this effect, it is informed that the fluctuation is out of place. In other words, it is a gusset notice indicating that the pattern is a deviation confirmation pattern. Of course, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, there may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 159 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a universal figure display device 210, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, A figure holding lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the 4th symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the 4th symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 154. For example, the display result of the 4th symbol is displayed by the light emission mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. For example, the fourth symbol display device 284 a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 200 and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a normal symbol changing notification region, a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. 1, and a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. While the regular symbol is stopped, the LED in the area where the quadrangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the regular symbol is changing, it is displayed blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit on and off, while the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is blinking or off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (1), the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 159 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and in response to this, the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs variation symbol display of the decorative symbol. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as necessary.

  In FIG. 159 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lighting in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and the holding is made. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 It is a display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 159 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 159 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. 1 second hold icon h12. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 159 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. 159 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 159 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 in stages.

  In FIG. 160 (14) following FIG. 159 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is a change in the hold icon and the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 160 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the icon h0 and becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 160 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (17), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat and the warning of the thousand boxes are shown at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (18). An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is the notice icon third display area. Displayed in YA3, fan notice icon I10 is displayed in notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 159 (10) to (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (20), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 160 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not changed yet.

  In FIG. 160 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 160 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 160 (23), when two or more identical notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two hat notice icons I6 are displayed, Although it is set in advance so that the displayed notice icon is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be determined at random, or may be set so that the notice icon displayed on the right side is preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate limited to those described above.

  After that, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 160 (25). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good. In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, for example, the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display form to the display form of the prefetching notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 160 (26), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  161 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 160 in stages.

  In FIG. 161 (28) continuing from FIG. 160 (27), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the length-length character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It may be the decoration 1 ”) to form the reach state and start the reach effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol display area 208b displays a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the Tono-like character. A display moving at a low speed from above to below is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 161 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed by notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed downward without being displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols out of place is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates that the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (34), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 161 (36). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 161 (37), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “Continue”, and thereafter, in FIG. 161 (38), the hat In response to the digestion of the previous notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo-ream effect Is informed to the player that there is a possibility of starting.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the number-length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are changed from “decoration 1” to “decoration”. The decoration is changed to “decoration 2”, a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the “pseudo × 2” character information may be displayed in another area. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed. In this effect example, after the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 161 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is, the easier it is to win a big hit in one symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one hat notification icon I6 is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and in the case where two hat notification icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice, the hat It is easier to win if the two notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the hat notice icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-rendition is performed twice, and three hat notice icons I6 are digested. In the case where the pseudo-rendition effect is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win if the three hat notification icons I6 are digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-continuous effect has started.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 161.

  In FIG. 162 (43) following FIG. 161 (42), the decoration symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach production is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (44), the above-described super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (45), a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. In other words, a display is performed in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the Senryoku notice icon I9 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (47), and above the enlarged Senryaku notice icon I9. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a production with higher reliability is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes with the character display of “promotion” at the timing of FIG. 162 (48). The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 162 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 162 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly dark, and the Tono-sama character appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 162 (50).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 162 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Is it too hot” on the dark background and then displays FIG. 162 (52). Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (53), a character display of “striking” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and notifies the player. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (55), as shown in FIG. 162 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 162 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1".

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 162 in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 163 (58) following FIG. 162 (57), all of the information including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 163 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan preview icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fan is displayed in an enlarged manner at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan warning icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 163 (62), and the warning icon display area 285 is framed upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 163 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 163 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 163 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot decision “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped is displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the re-variation effect is executed, resulting in a big hit. However, the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display area. If not displayed at 285, a re-change effect may not be performed, and an out-of-display result may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect that is executed after digesting the thousand-car box notice icon I9 is performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one of the thousand carousel notice icons I9 is digested, if the reach transition effect is executed as a fake notice corresponding to the digested thousand carousel notice icon I9, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of place. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice differs from the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be pre-ready notice. You may make it like, and it may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon increase effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166. Here, FIGS. 164 to 166 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 164 to 166, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 164 (8a) to (10a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (10). In other words, in FIG. 164 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9a-1), the thrown first lord's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (9 a-2), after the display of the first lord's notice icon I 1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is exploded, the timing shown in FIG. 164 (10 a). Thus, the notice icon I1 of the exploded first lord is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Also according to this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 164 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 164 (8b), an effect display in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6 is performed.

  Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9b). If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon I4 is displayed. It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. Thus, in this effect example, until the effect button 136 is operated, the big hit reliability indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize, so the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the big hit reliability. May work and enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Also, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the digest effect of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136. An effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  FIGS. 164 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 164 (8c), as in FIG. 159 (8), an effect display in which the hat warning icon I6 is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 164 (9c), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. Note that a gaze increase effect using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6 may be performed. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability, the harder the gaze increase effect may be.

  FIGS. 164 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 164 (7d) shows a state in which the character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 159 (7). Thereafter, in FIG. 164 (8d), there is an effect display in which not only one hat notice icon I6 but also three hat notice icons I6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9d), the notice icon I6 of the three hats thrown becomes the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that Since it is guaranteed that the performance is executed three times, it may be notified that the jackpot is determined. In addition, a high-reliability notice icon is unlikely to be displayed (not easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon is likely to be displayed (easy to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 164 (9d ′), a part or all of the thrown three hat notice icons I6 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, but from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production or the full gossip increase production which will be out of a frame.

  FIGS. 164 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (7) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 164 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 159 (7), the character YM of Tono-sama, which has a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes and a warning icon I10 for a fan in addition to the warning icon I6 for one hat. A state in which is moved and displayed up to a predetermined throwing position is shown. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon selected at random. May be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 164 (8e), an effect display is performed in which a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and, for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notices executed can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of kinds of notices can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 164 (9e ′), some or all of the three thrown notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of an area | region, or the total gossip increase effect.

  FIG. 164 (12f-1) to FIG. 164 (12f-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 159 (12). In other words, in FIG. 164 (12f-1), as in FIG. 159 (12), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a state where the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (12f-2), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIG. 165 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (8). In other words, in FIG. 165 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode (display mode by the Sabohani character), Tono-sama character YM displays the hat warning icon I6 as the warning icon display area 285. An effect display that is thrown toward the camera is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 165 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (8). In other words, in FIG. 165 (8h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the game board 200). It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the number of holds. The effect hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default light emission mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading notice light emission The drive control by the mode (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 165 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 165 (8i) to (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 165 (8i), as in FIG. 159 (8), an effect display in which the hat warning icon I6 is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 165 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat warning icon I6 does not reach the warning icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the prefetching notice display mode. An effect display (holding change effect) is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the hat warning icon I6 may not appear as the warning icon in the warning icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetching warning with the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed for a notice icon with a higher reliability of the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (9 i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, but holds it using the effect hold lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the hat notice icon I6 falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp in FIG. 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the pre-reading notice.

  FIGS. 165 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 159 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 165 (8j) is different from FIG. 159 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area instead of the Tono-sama character YM (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 165 (8j), the DJ character appears with a hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and the hat icon I6 held by the DJ is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display is put on. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 165 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 159 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 165 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (8k), the DJ character appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (9k), a hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-carton box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 165 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by placing it in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if In addition, as shown in FIG. 165 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in a carton box so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, a notice icon overwriting effect may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

  FIG. 165 (121) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 165 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the corresponding character notation. For example, a “continuation” character is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1, and the warning icon I9 for the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2 is displayed. Is displayed with an additional character “Elevation”, and the fan ’s warning icon I10 displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is additionally displayed with “Blessing”. The shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the area YA4 is indicated by a letter “Chang eyes”, and the ribbon notice icon I8 displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 has “STECHEN” A character is added and displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the sixth notice area YA6 of the notice icon displays “question” along with “question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed afterwards.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 165 (12l ′) and the same figure (12l ″), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are displayed as “question marks”, and the corresponding notice effect is clearly indicated. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified in advance that an effect display in which a big hit is decided is executed according to a combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. As shown in (12l "'), when three hat notification icons I6 with the" continuation "character notation are displayed in the notification icon display area 285, four pseudo-decisions are made to determine the big hit. You may make it notify that an effect display including a continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character added and displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when “promotion” is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for notifying that the result of the symbol variation display when the is digested is a big hit confirmed (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the production example described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of Tono-sama character YM and DJ character BY. However, in the production example shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 166 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. This reach production is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 166 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of the hat, a character notation “stock” is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is notified of an increase in the notice icon. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3), the notice icon icon of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the display is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  In FIG. 166 (B1), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Normal reach production begins.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (B2), the first icon notification icon design imitating the first icon notification icon I1 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example of production shown in FIG. 166 (B2), a character notation “stock” is appended to the first icon of the first icon, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that an advance notice icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (B3), the display of the first icon notification icon changes to the first icon notification icon I1 and moves to the notification icon first display area YA1 of the notification icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 166 (B4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result is a display error. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to a hat notice icon I6. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 for the hat, and may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the next and subsequent symbol variation display. You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 167 to 170 are diagrams showing another example of the notice icon digestion effect step by step. In FIGS. 167 to 170, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 167 (38m) to (40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 161 (38) to (40). In FIGS. 167 (38m) to (39m), the same effects as in FIGS. 161 (38) to (39) are performed, but in FIG. 167 (40m-1), the medium symbol display area 208b is slow. As shown in FIG. 167 (40m-2), the pseudo-continuous design is displayed at a high speed immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol becomes the stop display position of the decorative symbol. Is scrolled out to the lower side of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 167 (40m-3), a temporary stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 2”, and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed. Then, it is informed that the result of the stop display is a result of the deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  FIGS. 167 (23n) to (24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 160 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (23n), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, but as shown in FIG. 167 (24n), the digested hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and a notice that the digested effect is not performed is given.

  FIG. 167 (23o) to FIG. 16 (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 160 (23) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (23o), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 167 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols (FIG. 167 (24o-2)), the “decoration 1-decoration 2” -The combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2”) is displayed with temporary stop and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is out of place. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  FIG. 167 (22p) to FIG. 23 (23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 160 (22) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, in FIG. 167 (23p), in the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon) There may be an effect in which not the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1) but other notice icons are digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 167 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icon may not be digested in order from the left. In this embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the order in which they are stocked). However, the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when a notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to make a big hit, and conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the order in which the notice icons are digested may be determined regardless of the order of the stock. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected. You may make it do. In addition, a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be digested in a specific order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the shuriken A rule may be set such that a jackpot is determined when digested in the order of a notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, and a shuriken notice icon I7. As a result, the player may have an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, and may improve the game motivation.

  FIGS. 167 (24q-1) to (24q-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 160 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 167 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing for changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digest effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is ended.

  FIG. 168 (Aa) to FIG. 168 (Ae) show an effect example in the case where the notice icon increase effect is performed after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (Aa), after the shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed, At the timing indicated by 168 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 168 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon is performed by Tono-sama character YM. When the warning icon I9 of the Thousand Box is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. A notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested may be displayed.

  FIG. 168 (B) shows an effect example in the case where the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area as a result of digesting a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM When the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed and the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icon is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. The first sub-control unit It may be set in advance at 400. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. However, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the display areas that are blank in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. You may make it suggest that it displays on the display area 285, and you may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot is the highest.

  FIG. 168 (C) shows an effect example in the case where the digest effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is performed, and a state in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol change display executed before the symbol change display is executed. In this manner, the notice icon digestion effect and the notice icon increase effect may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, there may be a case where the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the notice icon increase effect is performed. Further, after the notice icon digestion effect starts, the notice icon increase effect may start, after the notice icon increase effect starts, the notice icon digest effect starts, or the notice icon The digesting effect and the notice icon increasing effect may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the announcement effect of the announcement icon is increased. It may be a region that will be blank before it is started.

  FIG. 168 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 163 (59). In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 168 (59r), an effect is given in which whether or not the notice icon is digested is started before the notice icon digest effect is started. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon is digested when the notice icon subject to digestion starts shaking and fluctuating. I try to speak. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. In the effect example shown in FIG. 168 (59r), when the fan warning icon I10 is erased without being digested, the result is a stop display with a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols. You may alert | report.

  FIG. 168 (59s) to FIG. 60 (60s) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 163 (59) to FIG. In other words, in FIG. 168 (59s), in the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed. Is different from the above, and after the fluctuation variation starts with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, it will be a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 168 (60s), if other notice icons (for example, hat notice icon I6) are digested, they will be lost. You may make it alert | report that it stops and displays by the combination of the decoration pattern of, and it will become off.

  FIGS. 168 (23t) to (32t) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 160 (23) to 161 (32). In other words, as shown in FIG. 168 (23t), in this effect example, in-notice icon display area 285, an in-digest notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added. As shown in FIGS. 168 (23t) to (25t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. Is displayed in the digestion advance notice icon display area YA0. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is continuously displayed even after digestion, as shown in FIGS. ) Will continue to be displayed. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be after the notice effect of the notice icon has started, or before the notice icon has been digested. Alternatively, it may be simultaneously with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased may be after the digest effect of the notice icon has ended, or before the digest effect of the notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the end of the notice icon digestion, after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon ends. It may be at the same time as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, or before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts. It may be simultaneously with the end of the corresponding production, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation when the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol) or being digested The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 162 (44), or only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased). Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digest icon notice area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A digested first is the digest icon of the notice icon A. It may be erased after or after the presentation is finished, and no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, or the digest effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be erased at the same time as or after starting, or erased at the same time or after the notice icon b displayed in the in-digest notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. For example, while the notice icon B is being digested, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice icon B may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased, and the advance notice is given. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the region 285 and the digesting advance notice icon display region YA0 may be deleted.

  FIGS. 169 (Aa) to (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. In other words, in FIG. 169 (Aa), a hat icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon for the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 on the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested respectively. Production begins. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be an order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ab), they are enlarged and each character display is additionally displayed. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is added and displayed near the lower portion of the enlarged hat notice icon I6, and a character display of “stechen” is added near the lower portion of the enlarged notice icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the ribbon notice icon I8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ac), after the shoji screen closes and the Chibi princess character CH appears on the front side, the shoji screen opens as shown in FIG. 169 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. During execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and it will be reduced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ae), the decorative symbol that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and then the player is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. .

  In this example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icons are made different from each other, but they may be started at the same time.

  FIG. 169 (66u-1) to FIG. 66 (66u-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 163 (66). In other words, in FIG. 169 (66 u-1), the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. In addition, it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 169 (66u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 169 (66u-3), after the big hit round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area while the big hit game is being executed, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect that informs that the probability change big hit is confirmed). For example, FIG. In the example shown in -3), if the hat notice icon I6 is digested during the jackpot game, a notification is made that the probable big hit is confirmed, and the fan notice icon I10 is digested. May notify that 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when other notice icons are digested, for example, a meaning that suggests that there is a possibility of promotion may be given. In this way, even if the same notice icon is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the jackpot game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIGS. 169 (Ba) to (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. In other words, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ba), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and then the hold is digested and the symbol variation When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 169 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 169 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when a stage change is performed. Note that after a stage change, the notice icon may be deleted, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or may not be deleted. Good.

  FIG. 169 (22v-1) to FIG. 23 (23v) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 160 (22) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 169 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 169 (22v-2), a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. The type of notice icon to be notified is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (23v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started in which the notice icon of the kind notified in advance (hat notice icon I6) is digested. Even if the advance notification of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance may be digested. May be. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  FIG. 169 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 160 (22). In other words, as shown in FIG. 169 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted, for example, so that the player pays attention to the digest of the notice icon. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. An effect corresponding to is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the Bancho character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. In the event that an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as determining the jackpot, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit is made when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probable change state or a short time state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit is made in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned after the probability change state or the time-short state is finished. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it may not carry over after a probability change state and a time-short state are complete | finished.

  Next, description will be made on an effect example in which the contents of the reach effect to be transferred thereafter are notified depending on the type of the notice icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, and the reach icon is reached, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 170 (Ac-1). Appears, and then shifts to a Bancho Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ab-2), when the Senryoku notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ac-2), the enlarged Tono-like character YM3 is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the Tono-sama reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. If the fan warning icon I10 is digested as shown in FIG. 170 (Ab-3), then, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ac-3), the enlarged princess character HM is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, this production example corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot meaning the notice icon, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach production is configured in the order of Hime Reach> Tonosama Reach> Bancho Reach Yes. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a Tono-like character enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called collapse of the law occurs). May be configured to determine the jackpot. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of notice icons may be digested, and a plurality of characters may appear correspondingly, so that the combination notice is executed. In addition, a specific effect for digesting multiple notice icons (multiple digest-only effect) may be executed, and it is a big hit if multiple notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested The reliability may be high.

  Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, the figure change display is started. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 170 (Bc), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Notifying that the operation can be accepted, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect performed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described button reach effect, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 170 (Cb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 170 (Cc). In this way, the project button button 136 changes to a projecting button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button reach production with higher jackpot reliability has been promoted.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 172, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 174 step by step.

  In FIG. 171 (1) to FIG. 172 (14), the notice icon used for the increase effect of the notice icon has been changed from the notice icon I6 for the hat to the notice icon I1 for the first lord. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 159 (1) to FIG. Also, with regard to the effects performed between FIGS. 172 (14) and 172 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice icon increase effect have been changed to the first icon notice icon I1. 160 is the same as FIG. 160 (15) to FIG.

  In FIG. 172 (20), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 172 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 172 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 172 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 172 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as when four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially digest the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Also, which notice icon is used may be determined at random, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be digested with priority. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 172 (25), a character display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (26), the “continuation” character display added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon first display area YA1 in the advance notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed is displayed. Gray-out display may be used, or character information “Done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (27) to 173 (33) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 with the digested hat notice icon I6 and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. Since the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, it is the same as FIGS. 160 (27) to 161 (33). Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (34), the display of digesting the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 173 (36), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notification icon I6.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (37), the “continuation” character display added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon second display area YA2 in the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the contents shown in FIG. 173 (38) to FIG. 45 (45) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. 161 (38) to 162 (FIG. 162) except that the notice icon displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (46), the display of digesting the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a thousand box notice icon I9 at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a higher-reliability effect is additionally displayed above the displayed notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “promotion” attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box disappears, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand car box is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 173 (48). In addition, the display to move to the original display position, that is, the third icon display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 174 (49), the reach transition effect described above is started. In this example, when the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 174 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect display that a power failure has occurred, and then the strong reach with high reliability. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach production in this production example is started, as shown in FIG. 173 (50-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Is it a chance?” Is displayed on the dark background. , A character display of “NO” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (50-2). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed, the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (55), as shown in FIG. 174 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is deleted. It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 174 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 174 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 174 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, a display that the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan's notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan warning icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 175 (62), the original display position, that is, the warning icon fourth display area in the warning icon display area 285 is displayed. Display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 175 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-change effect, as shown in FIG. 175 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 175 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (66), the combination of the big-decided decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon increase effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178. Here, FIGS. 176 to 178 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 176 to 178, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 176 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 176 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I1. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 176 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 176 (8 b), as in FIG. 171 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 176 (9b), it is shown that the first lord's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect using the notice icon of Tonosama.

  FIGS. 176 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 176 (8c), there is an effect display in which not only one first lord notice icon I1 but also three first lord notice icons I1 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown are notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon in notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. Further, a high-reliability notice icon (for example, the third lord's notice icon I3) is unlikely to be displayed (not stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first lord's notice icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (first lord's notice icon I1) is increased by three, but a plurality of kinds of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example, The first lord's notice icon I1 and the third lord's notice icon I3 may be increased simultaneously.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (9c ′), some or all of the thrown three first lord's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern is displayed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect or all the gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of the display area of the display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 176 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (8). In other words, in FIG. 176 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display form (display form by the Sabohani character), the Tono character YM displays the notice icon I1 of the first Tonori icon as the notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 176 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (8). In other words, in FIG. 176 (8 f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold number display for the effect is displayed. In FIG. 176 (8f), for the sake of convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched. However, in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  176 (8g) to FIG. 9G-2 show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 176 (8g), as in FIG. 171 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 176 (9g-1), a state is shown in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (9g-2), the first lord's notice icon I1 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the prefetching notice is made. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is not displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed by using a notice icon other than the first lord's notice icon I1, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  FIG. 176 (12h-1) to FIG. 12 (12h-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 171 (12). That is, in FIG. 176 (12h-1), in the same manner as in FIG. 171 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (12h-2), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIGS. 177 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 171 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285. However, FIG. 177 (8i) is different from FIG. 171 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, not the Tono-sama character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 177 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177 (9 i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and displays the first lord-like notice icon I 1 that is held in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 177 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 171 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 177 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 177 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9j), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 177 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is arranged on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if passing.

  FIGS. 177 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 171 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 177 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 177 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third icon-like notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9k), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first lord of the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY puts the third lord's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a warning icon with low jackpot reliability with a warning icon with high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 177 (121) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (12). In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 177 (121), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed with the character notation “question mark”. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. A notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, a notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and a notice of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. A notice icon I3 is displayed, and a notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and a character notation “question mark” is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 177 (12l ′), for some of the notification icons before the change, the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified in text. For example, the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation “question mark” attached thereto and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA3 is annotated with the letter “Chang eyes” and changed to a shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the word “continue” and changes to the hat notice icon I6. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6 is marked with “continuation” and “question mark” and is changed to a hat notice icon I6. Yes. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be gradually notified over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 177 (12l ″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the notice icons after the change, and the notice icon after the change is displayed. A corresponding character notation may be added to only the thing.

  178 (8m-1) to FIG. 9 (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 171 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 178 (8m-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 178 (8m−1), the DJ character BY appears with a notice box icon I9 for a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 178 (9m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the Thousand Box is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the preview icon I9 of the Thousand Box in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the preview icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this example, the notification icon before change may be overwritten from the notification icon after change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 178 (8n-1) to 9n show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to 9 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 171 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 178 (8n-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 178 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (8n-2), the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the warning icon first display area YA1 of the warning icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n) As the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area is thrown. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first lord's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notification icon after the change may be overwritten from the notification icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the first notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change is changed to the notice icon before the overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon after overwriting is digested than the notification icon before being overwritten, or the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may not be changed.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes step by step. In FIG. 179, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (A), a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears during the variation display of the decorative symbols. The placard is marked with the text “I will change” and notifies that the display mode will change for either the notice icon or the hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 179 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 179 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed as the prefetch notice display mode. To change. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change. In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, but displays it in a reduced size on the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the Princess Princess chance effect. The Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned usual-game variable game is executed. Chibi princess chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery. The princess Chibi character selects one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the displayed icon will be executed. For example, if the Chibi princess character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the wing member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is informed of the long opening, When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, the result of the symbol change display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached In advance, it is notified that the usual fluctuation display result is out of place.

  Furthermore, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by Tonen-san's notice icon is reached, as shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 At least one of the changes to the notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the third icon-like notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  Further, when the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 179 (D2), at least one of the hold icons of the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that is the default display mode is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change.

  In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example when power is interrupted or restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power is interrupted / restored while the notice icon is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, respectively, and in the notice icon third display area YA3, a thousand boxes are displayed. A warning icon I9 is displayed, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 180 (B), a power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 180 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power is restored instantaneously. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (C), a character display “Please wait for a while during recovery” is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a special display result “special figure I”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. When the power is interrupted / restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In the case of power interruption / recovery, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was the display mode of the pre-reading notice is also the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undecided” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undecided” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The prefetching notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved holds are consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for newly added hold (holding in which the pre-reading result is saved) after power interruption / recovery, and the pre-reading notice is given after all the hold containing “undecided” information is digested. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a pre-reading notice may be made before the hold containing “undecided” information is used.

  Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182. Here, FIG. 181 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table related to the notice item. It is.

  FIG. 181 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the common figure display apparatus 210, the common figure reservation lamp 216, and the 4th symbol display apparatus 284a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of FIG. 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of FIG. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 181 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both FIG. 1 and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A in FIG. 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icons are displayed left justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed or not as necessary.

  FIG. 181 (b) shows a state in which two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side aligned. These hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (c), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, since the first hold is consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left side as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of FIG. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 181 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. ).

  After the change of the display mode of the hold icon h11, when the timing shown in FIG. 181 (e) is reached, the advance notice icon It and the princess advance notice icon Ih are additionally displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285A. The That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has been increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by a balloon with the character notation “Atari” and “Question Mark” appears. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (g), after “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, so that the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (h). The In the present embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, if the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is out of sync, a notice icon Will not be digested, and no notice icon will be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digest icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the preview icon is digested and increased. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of FIG. Only the region 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (i), the display is stopped with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of place. .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (j), after the symbol variation display of the reserved special figure 1 is started, the notice icon “It” is digested and “Atari” and “Question mark” are displayed. Tono-sama character YI appears with a letter balloon. Note that the appearance timing of Tono-sama character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Also, in FIG. 181 (j), a notice icon Id of the bad actor is added and displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil agent is added and displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the Tono-sama notice icon It may be, or at the same time. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the appearance of the villain character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 181 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , You will be informed that it was a big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to perform the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 hold, An increase display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of / 50, an increase display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, and an increase display of the notice icon of the bad actor is executed with a probability of 2/50 . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tono-sama is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 25/50. Execute the digest display. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of place, when the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is suspended as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. Will display an increase in the notification icon of Tono-sama with a probability of 3/50, an increase display of the notification icon of the princess with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notification icon of the bad actor with a probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, digestion display of Tonen's notice icon is executed at a probability of 1/50, digestion display of a princess's notice icon is executed at a probability of 10/50, and a notice icon of an evil agent is executed at a probability of 15/50 Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold, , 25/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the princess, 20/50 probability to increase the number of the princess notice icon, 7/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the evil agent Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win the second special figure starting port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, The notice icon may not be displayed in an increased manner and any notice icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of place, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 on hold. Do not perform and do not display any notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the electric support state is finished and one or a plurality of suspensions remain for the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, an increase display and a digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result that is executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
A notice means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of notices ,
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means [for example, the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area in FIG. 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.]
The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol fluctuation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, in the on-hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed. ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is the first number [for example, two, etc. The second number larger than the first number [for example, 3 etc.] is digested more easily than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be executable in addition to a plurality of kinds of notices. The notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice is likely to be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to expect the number of notices displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the game can be played so that the player does not miss the notice display. There is a case that can be made.

  Here, only the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed may be displayed as the notice icon, or other than the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed, or if the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed is not displayed. There may be.

In addition, “the notice means may provide a fake notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.] that is the same as the aspect of the notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect or the like that is a big hit]]. A viable means,
The notice means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area has been digested, Is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a pseudo-announcement that leads to a loss or a reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice having the same form as the notice form, or may be capable of executing anything other than the fake notice having the same form as the notice form. May be. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form, or may not execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form.

  The notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In addition, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it may be possible to execute anything other than the fake notice of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon. . The notice means may always execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the design variation display result may be out of sync, or after the fake notice is executed, the design change display result may be a big hit. There may be.

  In addition, after a false notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that is highly likely to display a jackpot symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than display according to the number of holds. Moreover, the hold display means may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the subject of prefetching shown in FIG. 159 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [e.g., three pre-read objects shown in FIG. 159 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the prefetch target to be displayed is executed. Displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is performed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 168 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 168C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, and therefore the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of displayable hold displays and the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the total displayable maximum number of hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIGS. 162 (49) to (50), FIG. 174 (49), etc.]
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 169 (Ac) and FIG.
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 162 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 174 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be able to execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 159 (1) to FIG. 163 (66), FIG. 171 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 175 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. [For example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. When the thousand car box notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed compared to when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be a big hit if you are
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice display. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed outside the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the kind of notice icon corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon can be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second display means always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a kind of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times of displaying the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested can be expected. You may be able to let

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, “the second display means may be a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is lost. Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or other than the fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. Can also be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is also possible that when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. There may be a case where when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is always out of place after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display that is highly likely to display the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, “the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are configured, or at least one of the image display means and the hold display means may not be configured.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. Also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may necessarily display a decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holds while visually recognizing the decoration symbol variation display.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the subject of prefetching shown in FIG. 159 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [e.g., three pre-read objects shown in FIG. 159 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of holdings may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, notifications other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may be possible. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may be a notification that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 168 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 168C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg, 4 or 8],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holds differs from the displayable number of notice icons, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the notice icon display.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds. Good.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than the total of the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds in the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 162 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG.
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 169 (Ac) and FIG.
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 162 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 174 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 159 (1) to FIG. 163 (66), FIG. 171 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 175 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or digest even in normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or digest even during the execution of a special background mode for prefetching. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed, and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested when the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is not displayed, and the symbol “the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed” is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more easily displayed when the “symbol variation display with the notice display a” is performed than when the “variation display” is performed. The notice display b is a display that is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is easier to display the big hit symbol when the “symbol change display with the notice display b” is executed than when the “symbol change display with the notice display c” is executed. It may be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when the “symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested” is executed rather than the “symbol change display in which the notice icon C is digested” is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the “symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed, the jackpot symbol is more effective than the “symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed”. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may become easy.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A notice means capable of executing multiple kinds of notices;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means,
The on-hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”).
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number larger than the first number than the case where the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons is consumed by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to win if the number of two is digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same form as the notice form,
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one time symbol variation display is executed. It is configured so that is more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A holding display means capable of executing display according to the holding number;
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
In a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is being executed, the notice icon may be digested to the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon that is digested in the period during which the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number;
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example. For example, a game ball is enclosed in a body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine body for use. The present invention can also be applied to an expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

Claims (15)

A game machine with an operable movable body,
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion,
The first light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in the first state;
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the first movable part in the second state,
The second light emitting means is means that does not overlap the first movable part in the first state,
The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the first movable part in the second state,
The substrate on which the first light emitting means is mounted is a substrate on which the second light emitting means is also mounted,
In some cases, at least a part of the movable body overlaps at least a part of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that . The game stand according to claim 1,
The first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light in the second state,
In the second state, the first light emitting unit is a unit that is overlapped with the first movable part.
A game stand characterized by that . The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with the structure.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3, Comprising:
The first light emitting unit is a unit that overlaps the first movable part in an initial state.
A game stand characterized by that . The game table according to claim 4,
The first light emitting means is means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5, Comprising:
The movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a second movable portion,
The third light emitting means is means that does not overlap the second movable part in the first state,
The third light emitting unit is a unit that overlaps the second movable part in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 6, Comprising:
The first movable part is a movable part having a light emitting substrate,
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in an initial state.
A game stand characterized by that . The game stand according to claim 7,
The first light emitting means is means for overlapping the light emitting substrate in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 8, Comprising:
The first movable part is a movable part having a cover,
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the cover in an initial state.
A game stand characterized by that . The game table according to claim 9,
The first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable part.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 11, Comprising:
The second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable part.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 12, Comprising:
A game board having game nails;
The movable body is a movable body that is operable behind the game board.
A game stand characterized by that . It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 13 , Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14 ,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.